Asus P4GD1 User Manual
Motherboard P4GD1
ii ii ii ii ii Copyright é 2004 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTW ARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe. E1675 E1675 E1675 E1675 E1675 First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition July 2004 July 2004 July 2004 July 2004 July 2004
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Contents ............................................................................................. iii Notices ............................................................................................... vii Safety information ............................................................................ viii About this guide ................................................................................. ix Typography .......................................................................................... x P4GD1 specifications summary .......................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS Proactive features ........................................ 1-4 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................ 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-3 2.2.4 Layout Contents ..................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Overview ................................................................. 2-6 2.3.2 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-7 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan ................................ 2-9 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-12 2.4.2 Memory Configurations ......................................... 2-12 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-15 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-16 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card .............................. 2-16 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments .......................................... 2-17 2.5.4 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-18
iv iv iv iv iv Contents 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-18 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot ............................................... 2-18 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-22 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-22 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-24 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .................... 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 4-2 4.1.3 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-3 4.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-7 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-11 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-11 4.2.3 Navigation keys .................................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar .............................................................. 4-12 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-12 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-13 4.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 4-13 4.3.4 Language .............................................................. 4-13
v v v v v Contents 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ......... 4-14 4.3.6 IDE Configuration .................................................. 4-15 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-16 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-17 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration .................................... 4-17 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ................................................. 4-20 4.4.3 USB Configuration ................................................. 4-21 4.4.4 CPU Configuration ................................................. 4-22 4.4.5 Chipset ................................................................. 4-23 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration ............................ 4-25 4.4.7 PCI PnP ................................................................. 4-27 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-28 4.5.1 Suspend Mode ...................................................... 4-28 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ................................ 4-28 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .................................................. 4-28 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-28 4.5.5 APM Configuration ................................................ 4-29 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ................................................. 4-31 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-33 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-33 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-34 4.6.3 Security ................................................................ 4-35 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-37 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ......................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .......................................................... 5-3 5.2.4 Manuals menu ......................................................... 5-5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ...................................... 5-6 5.2.6 Other information ................................................... 5-6 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo⢠....................................................... 5-8
vi vi vi vi vi 5.3.2 AI NET 2 ............................................................... 5-10 Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠........................... 5-10 5.3.3 Audio configurations ............................................ 5-11 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.4.1 Installing hard disks .............................................. 5-17 5.4.2 ITE î 8212F RAID configurations ........................... 5-18 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-24 Contents
vii vii vii vii vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
viii viii viii viii viii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer.
ix ix ix ix ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and configuring the motherboard. How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized This manual contains the following parts: ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
x x x x x Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ) Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[filename] afudos /iP4GD1.ROM
xi xi xi xi xi P4GD1 specifications summary (continued on the next page) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking USB USB USB USB USB Special features Special features Special features Special features Special features Socket 478 for Intel î Pentium î 4 / Celeron processors Supports Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel î 915P Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel î ICH6 800/533/400 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 184-pin DIMM sockets support unbufferred non-ECC 400/333 MHz DDR memory modules Supports up to 4 GB of system memory 1 x PCI Express x16 slot for discrete graphics card 3 x PCI Express x1 slots 3 x PCI slots Intel î ICH6 Southbridge supports: -1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 drives -4 x Serial ATA drives ITE 8212F IDE RAID controller supports: -2 x Ultra DMA 133/100/66 drives - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, JBOD configuration Intel î High Definition Audio Realtek î ALC861 8-channel CODEC with Jack-sensing and Universal Audio Jack (UAJ î ) technology S/PDIF out interface support Marvell î 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN controller Supports Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester Technology Supports POST Network-diagnostic program ASUS AI NOS (Non-delay Overclocking System) feature ASUS AI Overclocking (Intelligent CPU frequency tuner) ASUS C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) CPU, Memory, and PCI Express voltage adjustable Stepless Frequency Selection(SFS) from 100 MHz up to 400 MHz at 1 MHz increment Adjustable FSB/DDR ratio with fixed PCI/PCI-Express frequencies Supports up to 8 USB 2.0 ports ASUS Q-Fan ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo
xii xii xii xii xii *Specifications are subject to change without notice. P4GD1 specifications summary BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal connectors connectors connectors connectors connectors Power Power Power Power Power Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD contents contents contents contents contents 4 MB Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP, DMI2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, WfM2.0 1 x Parallel port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 1 x Rear speaker out port 1 x Side speaker out port 1 x Line In port 1 x Line Out port 1 x Microphone port 1 x Center/Subwoofer port 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Serial port (COM) 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 1 x CPU fan connector 1 x Power fan connector 1 x Chassis fan connector 1 x Serial port connector (COM2 port) 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 4-pin ATX 12 V power connector 2 x USB 2.0 connectors for 4 additional USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical drive audio connector 1 x GAME/MIDI connector 1 x Chassis intrusion connector 1 x Front panel audio connector System panel connector ATX power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12 V 2.0 compliant ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS PC Probe ASUS Live Update utility Anti-virus software (OEM version)
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS î î î î î P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS P4GD1 motherboard I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules USB 2.0 (2 ports) and GAME (1 port) module Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables 2 x Serial ATA signal cables 1 x Serial ATA power cables 1 x Ultra DMA/133 cables 1 x IDE cable Floppy disk drive cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories I/O shield Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation User guide
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with a 478-pin surface mount, Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket for the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor in the 478-pin package with 512/256KB L2 cache on 0.13 micron process. This motherboard supports 800/533/400 MHz system front side bus that allows 6.4GB/s, 4.3GB/s and 3.2GB/s data transfer rates, respectively. The motherboard also supports Intel î Pentium î 4 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î 915P 915P 915P 915P 915P The Intel î 915P chipset provides the interface for a processor in the 478-pin package with 400/533/800MHz front side bus (FSB), dual channel DDR at speeds of up to 400MHz, and PCI Express x16-lane port for graphics card. The Intel î 915P GMCH platform is compliant to the Direct Media Interface (DMI) and supports the sixth generation I/O Controller Hub (ICH6). Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Employing the Double Data Rate (DDR) memory technology, the motherboard supports up to 4GB of system memory using DDR400/333 DIMMs. The ultra-fast 400MHz memory bus delivers the required bandwidth for the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. See page 2-12 for details. PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface The motherboard fully supports PCI Express, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI specifications. See page 2-18 for details. Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology The motherboard supports the Serial ATA technology through the Serial ATA interfaces and the Intel î ICH6. The SATA specification allows for thinner, more flexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate. See page 2-26 for details.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 RAID solution RAID solution RAID solution RAID solution RAID solution Onboard RAID controller provides the motherboard with RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using IDE disk drives. The ITE 8212 controller provides RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and JBOD functionality for two IDE channels that supports for up to four IDE hard disk drives. See pages 2-25 and 5-16 for details. 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio The motherboard supports 8-channel High Definition Audio through the onboard ALC861 CODEC with 24-bit DAC, a stereo 16-bit ADC, and an AC97 2.3 compatible multi-channel audio designed for PC multimedia systems. It also provides a Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF out support, interrupt capability and includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology. See page 2-22, 2-23 and 5-11 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready The motherboard supports the S/PDIF Out function through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel and at midboard. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-23 for details. USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-23 and 2-28 for details. Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond Super I/O) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components.
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See details on page 4-5. ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology The ASUS Q-Fan technology smartly adjusts the CPU fan speed according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. See page 4-31 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow you to configure easier and faster. See page 4-13 for details. ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) The ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 The AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility, you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable(s) connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port(s). During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable(s) and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy. See pages 2-22 and 5-10.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-22
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED that lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P4GD1 P4GD1 Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis P4GD1
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout P4GD1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CD Super I/O Intel FWH 4Mb A TX12V FLOPPY AAFP DDR DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) KBPWR SB_PWR USBPW34 USBPW12 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) P ANEL CHASSIS GAME USB78 USB56 USBPW78 USBPW56 COM2 SEC_RAID PRI_RAID CLRTC S ATA 1 CHA_F AN PCI1 Intel Grantsdale-P MCH Intel ICH6 DDR DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) PWR_F AN CPU_F AN PRI_IDE ITE 8212F ALC861 EA TXPWR S ATA 3 S ATA 2 S ATA 4 PCI2 PCI3 SPDIF_OUT Marvell 88E8053 R R PS/2KBMS T: Mouse B: Ke yboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O Below:Bass Center: Side surround L/R T op: Back surround L/R F_USB12 LAN_USB12 PCIEX1_1 PCIEX1_2 PCIEX1_3 PCIEX16 Socket 478
2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 Layout Contents Layout Contents Layout Contents Layout Contents Layout Contents Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Page Page Page Page Page 1. DDR DIMM slots 2-12 2. PCI slots 2-18 3. PCI Express slot 2-18 Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC1) 2-19 2. USB Device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) 2-20 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-21 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. PS/2 mouse port 2-22 2. Parallel port 2-22 3. RJ-45 port 2-22 4. Rear Speaker Out port 2-22 5. Side Speaker Out port 2-22 6. Line In port 2-22 7. Line Out port 2-22 8. Microphone port 2-22 9. Center/Subwoofer port 2-22 10. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 2-23 11. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-23 12. Serial connector 2-23 13. S/PDIF coaxial out port 2-23 14. PS/2 keyboard port 2-23
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-24 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) 2-24 3. Primary RAID ATA connector (40-1 pin PRI_RAID) 2-25 4. Secondary RAID ATA connector (40-1 pin SEC_RAID) 2-25 5. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-26 6. CPU fan connector (3-pin CPU_FAN) 2-27 7. Power fan connector (3-pin PWR_FAN) 2-27 8. Chassis fan connector (3-pin CHA_FAN) 2-27 9. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 2-28 10. USB headers (10-1 USB56, USB78) 2-28 11. ATX power connector (24-pin EATXPWR) 2-29 12. ATX 12V power connector (4-pin ATX12V) 2-29 13. Optical audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-30 14. GAME/MIDI connector (16-1 pin GAME) 2-30 15. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-31 16. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-31 17. System panel connectors (20-1 pin PANEL) 2-32 - System Power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) - Hard Disk activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) - System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) - Power/Soft-off button(Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) - Reset switch (Blue 2-pin RESET)
2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Take note of the marked corner (with gold triangle) on the CPU. This mark should match a specific corner on the socket to ensure correct installation. Incorrect installation of the CPU into the socket can bend the pins and severely damage the CPU! Gold Mark Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel î î î î î Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠This motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠We recommend that you install Windows î XP Service Pack 1. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www.intel.com/info/hyperthreading. 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with a surface mount 478-pin Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 Processor. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Your boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this motherboard: motherboard: motherboard: motherboard: motherboard: 1. Buy an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. Install the CPU. 2. Power up the system and enter BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Technology Technology Technology Technology Technology i s set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Reboot the computer. 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Follow these steps to install a CPU. 1. Locate the 478-pin ZIF socket on the motherboard. 2. Unlock the socket by pressing the lever sideways, then lift it up to a 90 ð -100 ð angle. Make sure that the socket lever is lifted up to 90 ð -100 ð angle; otherwise, the CPU does not fit in completely. Socket Lever Socket Lever Socket Lever Socket Lever Socket Lever 90 90 90 90 90 ð -100 -100 -100 -100 -100 ð angle angle angle angle angle P4GD1 P4GD1 478-pin CPU Socket
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that its marked corner matches the base of the socket lever. 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it fits in place. The CPU fits only in one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the pins and damaging the CPU! 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. Gold Mark Gold Mark Gold Mark Gold Mark Gold Mark After installation, make sure to plug the 4-pin ATX power cable to the motherboard. This motherboard does not support unlocked Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan The Intel î Pentium î 4 Processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Retention module base CPU heatsink Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink fits properly on the retention module base. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor, the package includes the heatsink, fan, and retention mechanism. ⢠If you buy a CPU separately, make sure that you use only Intel î -certified heatsink and fan. ⢠The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. ⢠You do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that a Thermal Interface Material is properly applied to the CPU heatsink or CPU before installing the heatsink and fan assembly.
2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Position the fan with the retention mechanism on top of the heatsink. Align and snap the four hooks of the retention mechanism to the holes on each corner of the module base. Retention hole Retention hole Retention hole Retention hole Retention hole Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped to the retention hole to the retention hole to the retention hole to the retention hole to the retention hole Retention lock Retention lock Retention lock Retention lock Retention lock Keep the retention locks lifted upward while fitting the retention mechanism to the module base. Make sure that the fan and retention mechanism assembly perfectly fits the heatsink and module base; otherwise, you cannot snap the hooks into the holes.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 4. When the fan and heatsink assembly is in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN. Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. P4GD1 P4GD1 CPU Fan connector CPU_F AN GND Rotation 12V 3. Push down the locks on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base. When secure, the retention locks should point to opposite directions.
2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with four 184-pin Double Data Rate (DDR) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. The following figure illustrates the location of the sockets: 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations You may install 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR DIMMs into the DIMM sockets using the memory configurations in this section. P4GD1 P4GD1 184-Pin DDR DIMM Sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 ⢠Installing DDR DIMMs other than the recommended configurations may cause memory sizing error or system boot failure. Use any of the recommended configurations in Table 1. ⢠In dual-channel configurations, install only identical identical identical identical identical (the same type and size) DDR DIMM pairs for each channel. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. ⢠Double-sided x16 modules are not supported in this motherboard. ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 4 GB of system memory when you installed four 1 GB DDR memory modules. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DIMM modules with 128 Mb memory chips or double-sided x16 memory chips are not supported in this motherboard.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations * For dual-channel configuration (3), you may: ⢠install identical DIMMs in all four sockets ⢠install identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 (blue sockets) and identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 (black sockets) ⢠install same size DIMMs in DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 (blue sockets) and another same size pair in DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 (black sockets) Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (black) (black) (black) (black) (black) (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (black) (black) (black) (black) (black) Single-channel (1) P opulated â â â (2) â P opulated â â (3) â â P opulated â (4) â â â P opulated Dual-channel (1) P opulated â P opulated â (2) â P opulated â P opulated (3) *P opulated Populated P opulated Populated Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A* A* A* A* A* B* B* B* B* B* C* C* C* C* C* 256MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/256 Hynix SS HY5DU56822BT-D43 ⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/512 Hynix DS HY5DU56822BT-D43 ⢠⢠256MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/256 Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT-5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/512 Infineon DS HYB25D256809BT-5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/256 KINGSTON SS D3208DL2T-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/512 KINGSTON DS D328DIB-50 ⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KHX3200A/512 N/A DS Heat-Sink Package ⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M368L3223ETM-CCC SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M368L3223FTN-CCC SAMSUNG SS K4H560838F-TCCC ⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M368L6423FTN-CCC SAMSUNG DS K4H560838F-TCCC ⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMD264646B8J-D43 AA Hynix DS HY5DU56822BT-D43 ⢠⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT8VDDT3264AG-40BCB MICRON SS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16VDDT6464AG-40BCB MICRON DS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64D32300GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT-5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64D64320GU-5-B Infineon DS HYB25D256800BT-5B ⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64D32300HU-5-C Infineon SS HYB25D256800CE-5C ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64D64320HU-5-C Infineon DS HYB25D256800CE-5C ⢠⢠⢠256MB CORSAIR CMX256A-3200C2PT Winbond SS W942508BH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB CORSAIR CMX512-3200C2 Winbond DS Heat-Sink Package ⢠⢠⢠512MB CORSAIR VS512MB400 VALUE seLecT DS VS32M8-5 ⢠⢠256MB GEIL GE2563200B GEIL SS GL3LC32G88TG-5A ⢠⢠⢠512MB GEIL GE5123200B GEIL DS GL3LC32G88TG-5A ⢠⢠512MB GEIL GE5123200B GEIL DS GL3LC32G88TG-5A ⢠⢠⢠256MB GEIL GD3200-256V GEIL SS GLIL DDR 32M8 ⢠⢠⢠512MB GEIL GD3200-512V GEIL DS GLIL DDR 32M8 ⢠⢠⢠(Continued on the next page)
2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A* A* A* A* A* B* B* B* B* B* C* C* C* C* C* 256MB TwinMOS M2S9I08AFAPS9F0811A-T PSC SS A2S56D30ATP ⢠⢠⢠256MB TwinMOS M2G9I08AIATT9F081AADT TwinMOS SS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠⢠512MB TwinMOS M2G9J16AJATT9F081AADT TwinMOS DS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠256MB Transcend TS32MLD64V4F3 Mosel SS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠512MB Transcend TS64MLD64V4F3 Mosel DS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Transcend TS32MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠512MB Transcend TS64MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠256MB A DATA MDOSS6F3G31Y0K1E0Z SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB A DATA MDOSS6F3H41Y0N1E0Z SAMSUNG DS K4H560838F-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB A DATA MDOHY6F3G31Y0N1E0Z Hynix SS HY5DU56822CT-D43 ⢠⢠⢠512MB A DATA MDOHY6F3H41Y0N1E0Z Hynix DS HY5DU56822CT-D43 ⢠⢠⢠256MB A DATA MDOAD5F3G31Y0D1E02 N/A SS ADD8608A8A-5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB A DATA MDOAD5F3H41Y0D1E02 N/A DS ADD8608A8A-5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Winbond W9425GCDB-5 Winbond SS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Winbond W9451GCDB-5 Winbond DS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB PSC AL5D8B53T-5B1K PSC SS A2S56D30BTP ⢠⢠⢠512MB PSC AL6D8B53T-5B1K PSC DS A2S56D30BTP ⢠⢠256MB KINGMAX MPXB62D-38KT3R KINGMAX SS KDL388P4EA-50 ⢠⢠⢠512MB KINGMAX MPXC22D-38KT3R KINGMAX DS KDL388P4EA-50 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB ATP AG28L64T8SMC4M MICRON DS MT46V64M4TG-5BC ⢠⢠256MB NANYA NT256D64S88B1G-5T NANYA SS NT5DS32M8BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠512MB NANYA N512D64S8HB1G-5T NANYA DS NT5DS32M8BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠256MB BRAIN POWER B6U808-256M-SAM-400 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB BRAIN POWER B6U808-512M-SAM-400 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠256MB CENTURY DXV6S8SSCCD3K27C SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB CENTURY DXV2S8SSCCD3K27C SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB CENTURY DXV6S8SSCCE3K27E SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB CENTURY DXV2S8SSCCE3K27E SAMSUNG DS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB CENTURY DXV6S8MC5BC3U27E MICRON SS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠⢠512MB CENTURY DXV2S8MC5BC3U27E MICRON DS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠⢠256MB elixir M2U25664DS88B3G-5T NANYA SS N2DS25680BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠512MB elixir M2U25664DS8HB3G-5T NANYA DS N2DS25680BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kreton N/A VT SS VT3225804T-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Kreton N/A VT DS VT3225804T-5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Veritech VT400FMV/2561103 VT SS VT56DD32M8PC-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Veritech VT400FMV/5121003 VT DS VT56DD32M8PC-5 ⢠⢠256MB Pmi MD44256VIT3208GMHA01 MOSEL SS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB Pmi MD44512VIT3208GATA03 MOSEL DS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠⢠⢠Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Single Sided DS - DS - DS - DS - DS - Double Sided DIMM Support: DIMM Support: DIMM Support: DIMM Support: DIMM Support: A A A A A - supports one module inserted into either slot, in a Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - supports on pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - support for 4 modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for the latest Qualified Vendors List.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Make sure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. A DDR DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1 DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1
2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function 01 System Timer 12 Keyboard Controller 2â Re-direct to IRQ#9 31 1 Communications Port (COM2)* 41 2 Communications Port (COM1)* 51 3 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 61 4 Floppy Disk Controller 71 5 Printer Port (LPT1)* 83 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 94 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C D D D D D E E E E E F F F F F G G G G G H H H H H PCI slot 1 â â â â â â used â PCI slot 2 â â â â â used â â PCI slot 3 â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x1 slot 1 shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x1 slot 2 â â shared â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x1 slot 3 â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x16 slot shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 1 â â â â â â â shared Onboard USB controller 2 â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 3 â â shared â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 4 shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB 2.0 controller â â â â â â â shared Onboard LAN â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard audio shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard PCI IDE RAID (ITE) âÂÂâ âÂÂâ used â â â When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphic cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The figure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The figure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2.6 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. P4GD1 P4GD1 Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear CMOS (Default) 12 23
2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S3 and S4 sleep modes (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). The USBPWR12 and USBPWR34 jumpers are for the rear USB ports. The USBPWR56 and USBPWR78 jumper is for the internal USB connectors that you can connect to additional USB ports. ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. P4GD1 3 2 2 1 P4GD1 USB device wake-up 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW56 USBPW78 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW12 USBPW34
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default is the Space Bar). This feature requires an ATX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. P4GD1 P4GD1 Keyboard power setting (Default) 5V 5VSB KBPWR 23 12
2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the rear speakers on a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio configuration. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio configuration. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player, or other audio sources. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker. In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel configuration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection 1 14 10 2 3 12 13 6 7 8 45 9 11
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Serial connector. Serial connector. Serial connector. Serial connector. Serial connector. This 9-pin COM1 port is for serial devices. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray ⢠Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black ⢠⢠⢠Side Speaker Out Yellow Orange ⢠⢠Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port Headset Headset Headset Headset Headset 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel Refer to the audio configuration table for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration.
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using an FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P4GD1 NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P4GD1 Floppy disk drive connector PIN 1 FLOPPY P4GD1 P4GD1 IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE PIN 1
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) These connectors are for Ultra ATA 133/100/66 signal cables. These connectors support up to four IDE hard disk drives that can be configured as a disk array through the onboard IDE RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up RAID configurations. ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Ultra ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Ultra ATA signal cable and installed Ultra ATA 133/100/66 hard disk drives. ⢠The system automatically assigns the boot sequence of ATAPI devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. ⢠The ITE î 8212F controller supports a maximum of 2 Ultra ATA hard disk drives. ⢠Set both drives either as Master or Slave before configuring a RAID 1 set. These connectors are set to IDE mode by default. In IDE mode, you can connect IDE devices to these connectors such as boot/data hard disk drives or optical drives. If you intend to create an IDE RAID set using these connectors, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item in the BIOS to RAID Mode. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. P4GD1 P4GD1 RAID connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE cable to PIN 1. PRI_RAID SEC_RAID
2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. The current Serial ATA interface allows up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate, faster than the standard parallel ATA with 133 MB/s (UltraDMA 133) Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠Install the Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack1 before using Serial ATA. ⢠Plug your Serial ATA boot disk on the master port (SATA1 and SATA2) to support S3 function. Refer to the table below for details. Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Use Use Use Use Use SATA1, SATA2 Master Boot disk SATA3, SATA4 Slave Data disk P4GD1 P4GD1 SA T A connectors S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND S ATA 4 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND S ATA 3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350mA~740mA (8.88W max.) or a total of 1A~2.22A (26.64W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors. P4GD1 P4GD1 Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V
2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. The Serial connector (COM2) module is purchased separately. P4GD1 P4GD1 Serial port connectors PIN 1 COM2 P4GD1 P4GD1 USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) These connectors are for an ATX power supply. The plugs from the power supply are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. ⢠It is recommended that you use an ATX 12 V Specification 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) with a minimum of 300 W power rating. This PSU type has 24-pin and 4-pin power plugs. ⢠If you intend to use a PSU with 20-pin and 4-pin power plugs, make sure that the 20-pin power plug can provide at least 15A on 12V and that the PSU has a minimum power rating of 300 W. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠The ATX 12 V Specification 2.0-compliant PSU passed the motherboard power requirement test with the following configuration: CPU : Intel î Pentium î 4 3.4 GHz Memory : 512 MB DDR (x 4) Grpahics card : PCI Express x16 Nvidia EN5900 Parallel ATA devices : IDE hard disk drive (x 2) Serial ATA device : SATA hard disk drive Optical drives : CD-ROM (x 2) SCSI devices : SCSI card and SCSI hard disk drive ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. P4GD1 P4GD1 A TX power connectors EA TXPWR A TX12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground 12V DC GND 12V DC GND
2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector is for the 4-pin audio cable that connects to the audio connector at the back of the optical drive. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P4GD1 P4GD1 CD audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P4GD1 P4GD1 GAME connector GAME 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC âÂÂ97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector. Connect a high-definiton front panel audio module to this connector to avail the high-definition audio features of the motherboard. P4GD1 P4GD1 Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default) P4GD1 P4GD1 Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy ACâÂÂ97 compliant definition Azalia compliant definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND BLINE_OUT_L MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L BLINE_OUT_R NC MICPWR 5V A AGND
2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system ON or puts the system in SLEEP or SOFT-OFF mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. P4GD1 P4GD1 System Panel Connector P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker SPEAKER PLED Ground Reset Ground Reset Ground Ground PWR SW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE LED
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the first time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Error Error Error Error Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Powering off the computer 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then click Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK OK OK OK OK button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then select Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-10 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-17 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-28 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-33 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-37
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS using a floppy disk during POST.) 3. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Start . Windows î 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup d. From the Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D: is your optical drive. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard and rename the same to P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM . 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP4GD1.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start erasing.......| Start programming...| Flashed successfully. Rebooting. ⢠Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! â¢A âÂÂFloppy not found!â error message appears if there is no floppy disk in the drive. A âÂÂP4GD1.ROM not found!â error message appears if the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk. Make sure that you rename the BIOS file to P4GD1.ROM.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS file in DOS environment using a bootable floppy disk with the updated BIOS file. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS file that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS To copy the current BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS file. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS file to the floppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done A:\> Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[filename] where the [filename] is any user-assigned filename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main filename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM ⢠Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 600 KB free space to save the file. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be exactly the same as shown.
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP4GD1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) Verifying flash .. done A:\> 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[filename] where [filename] is the latest or the original BIOS file on the bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP4GD1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file To update the BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP4GD1.ROM 4. The utility verifies the file and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! Write the BIOS filename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS filename at the DOS prompt.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP4GD1.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM .
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading file âÂÂP4GD1.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When no floppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy...
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . See page 5-3 for the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable firmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.7 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard and .
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings.
4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. Configuration options: [Français] [German] [English] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. System Time [11:51:19] System Date [Thu 05/07/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master : [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to Auto allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select CDROM if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select ARMD (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to Auto enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to Auto, the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] Smart Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to configure the item. IDE Configuration Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the operating system (OS) that you installed. Set to Enhanced Mode if you are using native OS, such as Windows î 2000/XP. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] The default setting S-ATA allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. We recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if only if only if only if only if you did not install any Serial ATA device.
4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 System Information System Information System Information System Information System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU specification System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.10 Build Date : 06/30/04 Processor Type : Intel(R) Pentium(R) CPU 3.40GHz Speed : 2800 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 512MB The P-ATA S-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA . Configuration options: [P-ATA S-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Configure CPU. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit JumperFree Configuration LAN Cable Status USB Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCI PnP 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency. Select either one of the preset overclocking options. Configuration options: [Manual] [Auto] [Standard] [Overclock Profile] [ AI NOS] Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Select the target CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default.
4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [Turbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Turbo] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to set the oveclocking options. Configuration options: [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] [FSB900/DDR-450] [FSB1000/DDR-500] [FSB1066/DDR-445] [FSB1066/DDR-533] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock Profile]. The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI N.O.S.]. N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Sensitive] [Heavy Load] The following item appears only when the N.O.S Mode item is set to [Standard], [Sensitive], or [Heavy]. Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Disables or sets the turbo non-delay overclocking system percentage. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Disables or sets the twin turbo non-delay overclocking system percentage. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 Selecting a very high CPU frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz FSB 400 100 MHz FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] Sets the Front Side Bus (FSB) termination voltage. Configuration options: [1.20V] [1.40V] [Auto] CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) Indicates the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The bus frequency (external frequency) multiplied by the bus multiple equals the CPU speed. The value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the following table for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU VCore voltage. A very high Vcore voltage can severely damage the CPU! Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Allows selection of the chipset core voltage. Configuration options: [1.50V] [1.60V] [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] Allows selection of the CPU VCore voltage. The configuration options vary depending on the CPU installed. Setting to Auto allows the BIOS to detect the VCore voltage of the CPU installed. The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI N.O.S.] or [Manual]. Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Allows selection of the DDR SDRAM operating voltage. Set to Auto for safe mode. Configuration options: [2.60V] [2.70V] [2.80V] [2.90V] [Auto] Refer to the DDR documentation before setting the memory voltage. Setting a very high memory voltage may damage the memory module(s)!
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status The items in this menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable. POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Open 0.0M 3-6 Open 0.0M 4-5 Open 0.0M 7-8 Open 0.0M POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] Enables or disables checking of the LAN cable during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [90] ~ [133] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] Selects the PCI Clock Synchronization mode. Configuration options: [To CPU] [33.33MHz] [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Enables, disables or set to Auto the clock generator spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [333 MHz] [400 MHz] [600 MHz] Selecting a DRAM frequency that is not supported by your DIMM module may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. See page 2-14 for qualified DDR DIMMs.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB function. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for USB devices on legacy operating systems (OS). Setting to Auto allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] The Module Version and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. USB Configuration Module Version - 2.23.2-9.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed]
4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3400 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 8 KB Cache L2 : 512 KB Cache L3 : 2048 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked Ratio Actual Value : 14 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 8] VID CMOS Setting: [ 45] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The default value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] Allows you to set the VID CMOS setting at which the processor is to run. The default value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS. Use the < > < > < > < > < > o r <-> keys to adjust the values. Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Enables or disables the Microcode Updation feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Enable this item to boot legacy operating systems that cannot support CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] When set to [Auto], the BIOS will automatically check the CPUâÂÂs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Disables or sets the CPU internal thermal control. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Hyper-Path 2 [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [3 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [3 Clocks] [2.5 Clocks] [2 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks]
4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge [15 Clocks] Sets the RAS Activate timing to Precharge timing. Configuration options: [1 Clock] [2 Clocks] ~ [15 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Sets the DRAM Write Recover Time. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Enables or disables the memory acceleration mode feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [Internal VGA] [PCI Express/Int-VGA] [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] [PCI/Int-VGA] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the PCI Express Graphics card buffer length. Configuration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the link latency. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express Graphics link mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Enables or disables the PCI Express Graphics root control. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the slot operating power. Configuration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Configure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard High-Definition Audio CODEC. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. This item appears only when the Onboard LAN item is set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Allows you to set the onboard ITE î 8212F RAID controller operating mode. Configuration options: [RAID Mode] [IDE Mode] [Disabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Sets the ITE8212F detecting device time. If the devices installed on the IDE RAID connectors cannot be detected, set this item to Standard Mode to enable complete detecting process. This item appears only when the ITE8212F Controller is set to IDE Mode. Configuration options: [Standard Mode] [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3]
4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] Allows selection of the Parallel Port EPP version. This item appears only when the Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode i s set to EPP EPP EPP EPP EPP . Configuration options: [1.9] [1.7] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330] MIDI IRQ Select [IRQ10] Sets MIDI port IRQ address. Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ10] [IRQ11]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [Yes] [No] 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Configure CPU. Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Allows BIOS to use PCI bus mastering when reading/writing to IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration Enabled or disable APM. APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Keyboard Wakeup Password : Not Installed Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try. Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on.
4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password This item appears only when the Power On By PS/2 Keyboard is set to Enabled. Select this item then press <Enter> to set or change the keyboard wakeup password. Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Shows Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed i f there is no wake-up password installed. After you have set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [51úC/122.5úF] MB Temperature [41úC/105.5úF] CPU Fan Speed [3813 RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select Disabled if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the field shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. When this field is set to [Enabled], the CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio item appears to allow selection of the appropriate fan speed ratio. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector. Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. Configuration options: [PWM] [DC] The CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode , CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio , and CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature items appear when you enable the CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan Control Control Control Control Control feature.
4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] Allows you to select the appropriate CPU fan speed ratio for the system. The default [Auto] automatically selects the fan speed ratio when operating a low CPU temperature. Select a higher ratio if you installed additional devices and the system requires more ventilation. This item appears only when the CPU Q-Fan Control item is Enabled. Configuration options: [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] Allows you to set the CPU temperature threshold when the CPU fan speed is increased to lower the CPU temperature. The default target temperature is the Intel î Fan Speed Control (FSC) recommended value. This item appears only when the CPU Q-Fan Control item is Enabled. Configuration options: [35úC] [38úC] [41úC] [44úC] [47úC] [50úC] [53úC] [56úC] [59úC] [62úC] [65úC] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the chassis, the specific field shows N/A. Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the power fan connector, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel î âÂÂs PWM fan specification. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM].
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Configuration Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Configuration Security 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S360]
4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo⢠feature. Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 Security Security Security Security Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âÂÂPassword Uninstalledâ appears.
4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access No Access No Access No Access No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only View Only View Only View Only View Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited allows changes only to selected fields, such as Date and Time. Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility. Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. Select Screen Select Item If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.7 Exit menu Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults
4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes o r make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes to save changes and exit.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-24
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary. Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only. Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update Installs the Quick Fix Engineering (QFE) driver updates. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program This item installs the Intel î Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel î chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for configuring the chipset components. You can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent, or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility for details. Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Executes the wizard to install the Realtek î ALC861 audio driver and application. Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the Marvell î Yukon 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN driver that provides up to 1000 Mbps data transfer rates.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 The screen display and drivers option may not be the same for different operating system versions. 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application Installs the IT8212 driver and application. Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Allows you to create a driver disk for the IT8212 IDE RAID setup. USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver. Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Installs the Marvell î Yukon VCT cable diagnostic application that analyzes and reports LAN cable faults and shorts. See page 5-10 for details. ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition.
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in a Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). See page 4-7 for details. ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in a Windows î environment. Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX The Microsoft DirectX 9.0b is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer. Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Installs the anti-virus program. View the online help for detailed information. ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader The Adobeî Acrobatî Reader V5.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Installs the ASUS screen saver. The screen display and utilities option may not be the same for different operating system versions.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 The screen display and manuals option may not be the same for different operating system versions. 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu The Manuals menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual Allows you to open the ITE î 8212F RAID UserâÂÂs manual. Install the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader from the Utilities menu before opening the manual files.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information Click the Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also find this information on the inside front cover of this user guide. 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Other information Other information Other information Other information Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Displays the general specifications of the motherboard.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Displays the ASUS Technical Support Request Form that you have to fill out when requesting technical support. Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD and a brief description of each in text format. Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Displays the support CD contents in graphical format.
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠The ASUS MyLogo⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-Tests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section âÂÂ5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. To launch the ASUS MyLogoâ¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility. Refer to section âÂÂ4.1.4 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options Options Options Options Options from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS , then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS file, then click Next Next Next Next Next . The ASUS MyLogo window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogoâ¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section âÂÂ4.1.2 AFUDOS utilityâÂÂ. ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo i s set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogoâ¢. See section âÂÂ4.6.2 Boot Settings ConfigurationâÂÂ. ⢠You can create your own boot logo image in GIF, JPG, or BMP file formats.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility, flash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After flashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST. 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Click the Run Run Run Run Run button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 The Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠(VCT) is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 64 ns at one meter accuracy. The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems software for ideal field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠To use the the Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester . 2. Click Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester from the menu to display the screen below. ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows î XP or Windows î 2000 operating systems. ⢠The VCT utility only tests Ethernet cables connected to Gigabit LAN port(s). ⢠The Run Run Run Run Run button on the Virtual Cable Tester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable item in the BIOS.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations The Realtek î ALC861 High Definition Audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF out support and interrupt capability. The includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for three ports (Line-In, Line-Out and Mic-In), eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. The utility is automatically installed when you install the Realtek Audio Driver from the motherboard support CD. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.2 DriverâÂÂs MenuâÂÂ. Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager From the Windows î taskbar, double-click the Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect icon to display the Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager . Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect icon icon icon icon icon Using the Realtek Using the Realtek Using the Realtek Using the Realtek Using the Realtek î î î î î Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager The Realtek î Sound Manager has six menu options: Sound Effect, Speaker Configuration, 3D Audio Demo, General, SPDIF, and Audio Wizard. Click a button to display the details. Sound Effect The Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect option allows you to set the environment, change the karaoke configuration, and adjust the equalizer settings. Click the Sound Sound Sound Sound Sound Effect Effect Effect Effect Effect button to display the following. Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment settings settings settings settings settings Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer settings settings settings settings settings Karaoke Karaoke Karaoke Karaoke Karaoke
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Environment. Environment. Environment. Environment. Environment. This section contains various pre-programmed environment settings. There are five featured materials that emulate the bathroom, an auditorium, sewer pipe, an arena, and underwater environments. Click the corresponding button to set an environment emulation. To set other environment emulations, click the combo list box and select from any of the environment settings. Equalizer. Equalizer. Equalizer. Equalizer. Equalizer. The Equalizer section allows you to adjust the amplifier frequency. Use the 10-band equalizer to individually control the different frequency bands of your speaker system, or click a music style preset button to load a pre-defined equalizer setting. Click the corresponding control button to load, save, reset, or delete a user-defined preset. Karaoke. Karaoke. Karaoke. Karaoke. Karaoke. The Karaoke section allows you to toggle the voice and adjust the pitch of the audio. Click the up or down arrows to adjust the pitch or the icon to toggle the voice. Speaker Configuration The Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration option allows you to configure and test your speaker setup. Select your speaker setup to display the function of the front and back panel audio ports.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo option shows a 3D audio demonstration with variable sound type, moving path and EAX settings. Click the Play Play Play Play Play o r Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop button to start or stop the demo. Click the corresponding option button to adjust the sound type, moving path and EAX settings. General The General General General General General option displays your audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller, and audio CODEC. Enable the option button to display the Sound Effect icon on the system tray. To change the language interface, click the combo list box and select from the list of supported languages.
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support ⢠The front panel audio connectors support both the Realtek î Jack-sensing and UAJ î technology features. ⢠The Back Panel audio connectors support the Realtek î Jack-sensing function only. SPDIF The SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF option allows you to set the S/PDIF output and change the S/PDIF output frequency. Click the option button of your choice. Audio Wizard The Audio Wizard Audio Wizard Audio Wizard Audio Wizard Audio Wizard guides you to the proper audio port for the device you plugged in. Click the Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel o r Back Panel Back Panel Back Panel Back Panel Back Panel button to display their respective audio ports. Click OK OK OK OK OK when finished.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation The functions of the Line Out (lime), Line In (blue), Mic (pink), Rear Speaker Out (gray), Side Speaker Out (black), and Center/Subwoofer (yellow orange) ports on the rear panel change when you select the 4-channel, 6-channel or 8-channel audio configuration as shown in the following table. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray ⢠Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black ⢠⢠⢠Side Speaker Out Yellow Orange ⢠⢠Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port Headset Headset Headset Headset Headset 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. 5.4 RAID configurations The motherboard comes with the ITE î 8212F RAID controller that allows you to configure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA 133/100/66 and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive.
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE î î î î î 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility To enter the ITE î 8212F Setup Utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. The ITE8212F controller scans for IDE devices attached on the IDE RAID ports. When prompted, press <Ctrl F> or <Ctrl E> to display the main menu of the utility. Auto Configuration...........[ 1 ] Define RAID..................[ 2 ] Delete RAID..................[ 3 ] Rebuild RAID.................[ 4 ] RAID Card Configuration......[ 5 ] IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit [MAIN MENU] 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 ITE ITE ITE ITE ITE î î î î î 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations The ITE î 8212F IDE RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD configurations. Use the IT8212 BIOS Setup Utility or the ATA RAID Manager application to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu in the BIOS, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item to RAID Mode. 3. Save your changes and exit Setup.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 RAID Mode................................ Stripe Un-used Drive(s)......................... 4 Drive(s) in Array........................ 0 Array Capacity (size in MB).............. 8056 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Auto Configuration Menu ] [ Array Configuration ] Setup Array Type as: RAID 0 [ âÂÂ, â ,Space] Change Option [CTRL-Y] Save [ESC] Exit 3. At the bottom of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select from the menu options. Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array This option allows you to select a supported RAID set for the utility to automatically configure. To auto-configure a RAID set: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <1>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the left or right arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID set. As you select an option, the screen displays the array configuration of the RAID based on the number of IDE devices installed. 3. Press <Ctrl Y> to save your RAID set. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. Press the number of your selection or <Esc> to exit. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 1 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â : Capacity (GB) ⦠: Bootable Array [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Space] Boot Array [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array This option allows you to define supported RAID arrays. To define a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <2>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID array, then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Sub-Menu ] â : Capacity (GB) [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Space] Change Option [Ctrl-Y] Save [ESC] Exit Channel ID Drive Name Size(MB) Assignment Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y [ Drive Assignments] Array No Array Mode Drive No Status Array 0 Stripe 4 Functional Block Size: 64KB
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select editable fields. 4. Use the Space bar to change field values. 5. Press <Ctrl Y> to save RAID array. 6. Press <Esc> to exit. Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array This option allows you to delete an existing RAID array. To delete a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <3>. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Delete RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 2 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â : Capacity (GB) ⦠: Bootable Array [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [D] Delete [ESC] Exit 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <D> to delete. 3. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Rebuild RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 4 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â : Capacity (GB) ⦠: Bootable Array [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array This option allows you to reconstruct an existing RAID array. This option applies only to RAID1 (Mirrored) or RAID 0 1(Striped Mirrored) sets. To rebuild a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <4>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <Enter> to rebuild. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Source Drive ] [ Target Drive ] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX â : Capacity (GB) [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit [ Drive List] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 Channel 0 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000AC00 Channel 1 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000A800 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ RAID Card Configuration ] [ RAID Card Resource ] Auto-Rebuild: Enable â : Capacity (GB) Drive Mode: P = PIO, D = DMA, U = UDMA [ âÂÂ, â ,Space] Change Option [ESC] Exit Channel Size Drive ID Drive Name (MB) Array No Mode Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U5 Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U2 Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U4 Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U6 [ Drive Status ] 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a drive, then press <Enter>. Follow succeeding screen instructions. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration This option allows you to view your RAID configuration. You can also enable or disable the Auto-rebuild function in this section. To view your RAID configuration: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <5>. The following screen appears. 3. Use the left or right keys or the space bar enable or disable the Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild item. 4. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. To create a RAID driver disk: 1. Place the motherboard support CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, select the RAID driver disk you want to create: ⢠Click Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver t o create an ITE î 8212F RAID driver disk. Or Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe for the ITE î 8212F RAID driver disk utility 4. Insert a formatted high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. 5. Follow succeeding screen information to complete process. 6. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. To install the RAID driver: 1. Install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. During installation, the computer prompts you to press the F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 key if you want to install a third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6> then insert the RAID driver disk into the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.2 Drivers menuâ for details.
ii ii ii ii ii Copyright é 2004 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (âÂÂASUSâÂÂ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âÂÂAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTW ARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe. E1675 E1675 E1675 E1675 E1675 First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition First Edition July 2004 July 2004 July 2004 July 2004 July 2004
iii iii iii iii iii Contents Contents ............................................................................................. iii Notices ............................................................................................... vii Safety information ............................................................................ viii About this guide ................................................................................. ix Typography .......................................................................................... x P4GD1 specifications summary .......................................................... xi Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights ................................................... 1-2 1.3.2 ASUS Proactive features ........................................ 1-4 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features ....................................... 1-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 Placement direction ................................................ 2-2 2.2.2 Screw holes ............................................................ 2-2 2.2.3 Motherboard layout ................................................ 2-3 2.2.4 Layout Contents ..................................................... 2-4 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.3.1 Overview ................................................................. 2-6 2.3.2 Installing the CPU .................................................... 2-7 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan ................................ 2-9 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.4.1 Overview ............................................................... 2-12 2.4.2 Memory Configurations ......................................... 2-12 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................... 2-15 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM ................................................. 2-15 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card .................................. 2-16 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card .............................. 2-16 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments .......................................... 2-17 2.5.4 PCI slots ................................................................ 2-18
iv iv iv iv iv Contents 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot ............................................. 2-18 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot ............................................... 2-18 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-22 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors .......................................... 2-22 2.7.2 Internal connectors ............................................... 2-24 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function ........................... 3-2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch .................... 3-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk .............................. 4-1 4.1.2 ASUS EZ Flash utility .............................................. 4-2 4.1.3 AFUDOS utility ........................................................ 4-3 4.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ................................ 4-5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ................................................ 4-7 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-10 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................. 4-11 4.2.2 Menu bar ............................................................... 4-11 4.2.3 Navigation keys .................................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Menu items ........................................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Configuration fields .............................................. 4-12 4.2.7 Pop-up window ..................................................... 4-12 4.2.8 Scroll bar .............................................................. 4-12 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-12 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-13 4.3.1 System Time ......................................................... 4-13 4.3.2 System Date ......................................................... 4-13 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A ................................................ 4-13 4.3.4 Language .............................................................. 4-13
v v v v v Contents 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave ......... 4-14 4.3.6 IDE Configuration .................................................. 4-15 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-16 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-17 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration .................................... 4-17 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status ................................................. 4-20 4.4.3 USB Configuration ................................................. 4-21 4.4.4 CPU Configuration ................................................. 4-22 4.4.5 Chipset ................................................................. 4-23 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration ............................ 4-25 4.4.7 PCI PnP ................................................................. 4-27 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-28 4.5.1 Suspend Mode ...................................................... 4-28 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume ................................ 4-28 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support .................................................. 4-28 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support ................................................ 4-28 4.5.5 APM Configuration ................................................ 4-29 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor ................................................. 4-31 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-33 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority .............................................. 4-33 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-34 4.6.3 Security ................................................................ 4-35 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-37 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ......................................... 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu .......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu .......................................................... 5-3 5.2.4 Manuals menu ......................................................... 5-5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ...................................... 5-6 5.2.6 Other information ................................................... 5-6 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo⢠....................................................... 5-8
vi vi vi vi vi 5.3.2 AI NET 2 ............................................................... 5-10 Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠........................... 5-10 5.3.3 Audio configurations ............................................ 5-11 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.4.1 Installing hard disks .............................................. 5-17 5.4.2 ITE î 8212F RAID configurations ........................... 5-18 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-24 Contents
vii vii vii vii vii Notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturerâÂÂs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the userâÂÂs authority to operate this equipment.
viii viii viii viii viii Safety information Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety Electrical safety ⢠To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adapter or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company. ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer. Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately. ⢠To avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry. ⢠Avoid dust, humidity, and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer.
ix ix ix ix ix About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing and configuring the motherboard. How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized How this guide is organized This manual contains the following parts: ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠⢠⢠⢠⢠Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites ASUS websites The ASUS website provides updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Optional documentation Your product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer. These documents are not part of the standard package.
x x x x x Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide Conventions used in this guide To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Typography DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task. IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task. Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase <Key> Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key Example: <Enter> means that you must press the Enter or Return key <Key1 Key2 Key3> If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign ( ) Example: <Ctrl Alt D> Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets Example: At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /i[filename] afudos /iP4GD1.ROM
xi xi xi xi xi P4GD1 specifications summary (continued on the next page) CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Memory Memory Memory Memory Memory Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Expansion slots Storage Storage Storage Storage Storage High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition High Definition Audio Audio Audio Audio Audio LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking Overclocking USB USB USB USB USB Special features Special features Special features Special features Special features Socket 478 for Intel î Pentium î 4 / Celeron processors Supports Intel î Hyper-Threading Technology Northbridge: Intel î 915P Memory Controller Hub (MCH) Southbridge: Intel î ICH6 800/533/400 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture 4 x 184-pin DIMM sockets support unbufferred non-ECC 400/333 MHz DDR memory modules Supports up to 4 GB of system memory 1 x PCI Express x16 slot for discrete graphics card 3 x PCI Express x1 slots 3 x PCI slots Intel î ICH6 Southbridge supports: -1 x Ultra DMA 100/66/33 drives -4 x Serial ATA drives ITE 8212F IDE RAID controller supports: -2 x Ultra DMA 133/100/66 drives - RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, JBOD configuration Intel î High Definition Audio Realtek î ALC861 8-channel CODEC with Jack-sensing and Universal Audio Jack (UAJ î ) technology S/PDIF out interface support Marvell î 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN controller Supports Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester Technology Supports POST Network-diagnostic program ASUS AI NOS (Non-delay Overclocking System) feature ASUS AI Overclocking (Intelligent CPU frequency tuner) ASUS C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) CPU, Memory, and PCI Express voltage adjustable Stepless Frequency Selection(SFS) from 100 MHz up to 400 MHz at 1 MHz increment Adjustable FSB/DDR ratio with fixed PCI/PCI-Express frequencies Supports up to 8 USB 2.0 ports ASUS Q-Fan ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS MyLogo
xii xii xii xii xii *Specifications are subject to change without notice. P4GD1 specifications summary BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features BIOS features Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Rear panel Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal connectors connectors connectors connectors connectors Power Power Power Power Power Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Requirement Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Form Factor Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD Support CD contents contents contents contents contents 4 MB Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP, DMI2.0, SM BIOS 2.3, WfM2.0 1 x Parallel port 1 x LAN (RJ-45) port 1 x Rear speaker out port 1 x Side speaker out port 1 x Line In port 1 x Line Out port 1 x Microphone port 1 x Center/Subwoofer port 4 x USB 2.0 ports 1 x Serial port (COM) 1 x Coaxial S/PDIF out port 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 1 x CPU fan connector 1 x Power fan connector 1 x Chassis fan connector 1 x Serial port connector (COM2 port) 1 x 24-pin ATX power connector 1 x 4-pin ATX 12 V power connector 2 x USB 2.0 connectors for 4 additional USB 2.0 ports 1 x Optical drive audio connector 1 x GAME/MIDI connector 1 x Chassis intrusion connector 1 x Front panel audio connector System panel connector ATX power supply (with 24-pin and 4-pin 12 V plugs) ATX 12 V 2.0 compliant ATX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in (30.5 cm x 24.4 cm) Device drivers ASUS PC Probe ASUS Live Update utility Anti-virus software (OEM version)
1 Product introduction This chapter describes the motherboard features and the new technologies it supports.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 1.1 Welcome! .............................................................................. 1-1 1.2 Package contents ................................................................. 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................... 1-2
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1.1 Welcome! Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS Thank you for buying an ASUS î î î î î P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! P4GD1 motherboard! The motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies, making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below. If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer. 1.2 Package contents Check your motherboard package for the following items. Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard ASUS P4GD1 motherboard I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules I/O modules USB 2.0 (2 ports) and GAME (1 port) module Cables Cables Cables Cables Cables 2 x Serial ATA signal cables 1 x Serial ATA power cables 1 x Ultra DMA/133 cables 1 x IDE cable Floppy disk drive cable Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories I/O shield Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs Application CDs ASUS motherboard support CD Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation Documentation User guide
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 1.3.1 Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Product highlights Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology Latest processor technology The motherboard comes with a 478-pin surface mount, Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket for the Intel î Pentium î 4 processor in the 478-pin package with 512/256KB L2 cache on 0.13 micron process. This motherboard supports 800/533/400 MHz system front side bus that allows 6.4GB/s, 4.3GB/s and 3.2GB/s data transfer rates, respectively. The motherboard also supports Intel î Pentium î 4 processors with Hyper-Threading Technology. Intel Intel Intel Intel Intel î î î î î 915P 915P 915P 915P 915P The Intel î 915P chipset provides the interface for a processor in the 478-pin package with 400/533/800MHz front side bus (FSB), dual channel DDR at speeds of up to 400MHz, and PCI Express x16-lane port for graphics card. The Intel î 915P GMCH platform is compliant to the Direct Media Interface (DMI) and supports the sixth generation I/O Controller Hub (ICH6). Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Dual-channel DDR memory support Employing the Double Data Rate (DDR) memory technology, the motherboard supports up to 4GB of system memory using DDR400/333 DIMMs. The ultra-fast 400MHz memory bus delivers the required bandwidth for the latest 3D graphics, multimedia, and Internet applications. See page 2-12 for details. PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface PCI Express⢠interface The motherboard fully supports PCI Express, the latest I/O interconnect technology that speeds up the PCI bus. PCI Express features point-to-point serial interconnections between devices and allows higher clockspeeds by carrying data in packets. This high speed interface is software compatible with existing PCI specifications. See page 2-18 for details. Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology Serial ATA technology The motherboard supports the Serial ATA technology through the Serial ATA interfaces and the Intel î ICH6. The SATA specification allows for thinner, more flexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, and up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate. See page 2-26 for details.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 1-3 RAID solution RAID solution RAID solution RAID solution RAID solution Onboard RAID controller provides the motherboard with RAID functionality that allows you to select the best RAID solution using IDE disk drives. The ITE 8212 controller provides RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1, and JBOD functionality for two IDE channels that supports for up to four IDE hard disk drives. See pages 2-25 and 5-16 for details. 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio 8-channel high definition audio The motherboard supports 8-channel High Definition Audio through the onboard ALC861 CODEC with 24-bit DAC, a stereo 16-bit ADC, and an AC97 2.3 compatible multi-channel audio designed for PC multimedia systems. It also provides a Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF out support, interrupt capability and includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology. See page 2-22, 2-23 and 5-11 for details. S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready S/PDIF digital sound ready The motherboard supports the S/PDIF Out function through the S/PDIF interfaces on the rear panel and at midboard. The S/PDIF technology turns your computer into a high-end entertainment system with digital connectivity to powerful audio and speaker systems. See page 2-23 for details. USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, dramatically increasing the connection speed from the 12 Mbps bandwidth on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-23 and 2-28 for details. Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring Temperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the ASIC (integrated in the Winbond Super I/O) to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The ASIC monitors the voltage levels to ensure stable supply of current for critical components.
1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 1.3.3 Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features Innovative ASUS features CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See details on page 4-5. ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology ASUS Q-Fan technology The ASUS Q-Fan technology smartly adjusts the CPU fan speed according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. See page 4-31 for details. ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow you to configure easier and faster. See page 4-13 for details. ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠This new feature present in the motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 1.3.2 ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features ASUS Proactive features AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) AI NOS⢠(Non-Delay Overclocking System) The ASUS Non-delay Overclocking System⢠(NOS) is a technology that auto-detects the CPU loading and dynamically overclocks the CPU speed only when needed. AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 AI NET2 The AI NET2 is a BIOS-based diagnostic tool that detects and reports Ethernet cable faults and shorts. With this utility, you can easily monitor the condition of the Ethernet cable(s) connected to the LAN (RJ-45) port(s). During the bootup process, AI NET2 immediately diagnoses the LAN cable(s) and reports shorts and faults up to 100 meters at 1 meter accuracy. See pages 2-22 and 5-10.
2 Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the jumpers and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 2.1 Before you proceed .............................................................. 2-1 2.2 Motherboard overview .......................................................... 2-2 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) .............................................. 2-6 2.4 System memory ................................................................. 2-12 2.5 Expansion slots ................................................................... 2-16 2.6 Jumpers .............................................................................. 2-19 2.7 Connectors ......................................................................... 2-22
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED Onboard LED The motherboard comes with a standby power LED that lights up to indicate that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode. This is a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component. The illustration below shows the location of the onboard LED. 2.1 Before you proceed Take note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. ⢠Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. ⢠Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity ⢠Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. ⢠Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. ⢠Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the that the ATX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. power cord is detached from the power supply. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. P4GD1 P4GD1 Onboard LED SB_PWR ON Standby Power OFF Powered Off
2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2 Motherboard overview Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so can cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components. Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so can damage the motherboard. 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 2.2.1 Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below. 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 2.2.2 Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards Place this side towards the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis the rear of the chassis P4GD1
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout Motherboard layout P4GD1 CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CD Super I/O Intel FWH 4Mb A TX12V FLOPPY AAFP DDR DIMM_A1 (64 bit,240-pin module) KBPWR SB_PWR USBPW34 USBPW12 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in) P ANEL CHASSIS GAME USB78 USB56 USBPW78 USBPW56 COM2 SEC_RAID PRI_RAID CLRTC S ATA 1 CHA_F AN PCI1 Intel Grantsdale-P MCH Intel ICH6 DDR DIMM_A2 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR DIMM_B1 (64 bit,240-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (64 bit,240-pin module) PWR_F AN CPU_F AN PRI_IDE ITE 8212F ALC861 EA TXPWR S ATA 3 S ATA 2 S ATA 4 PCI2 PCI3 SPDIF_OUT Marvell 88E8053 R R PS/2KBMS T: Mouse B: Ke yboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O Below:Bass Center: Side surround L/R T op: Back surround L/R F_USB12 LAN_USB12 PCIEX1_1 PCIEX1_2 PCIEX1_3 PCIEX16 Socket 478
2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 2.2.4 Layout Contents Layout Contents Layout Contents Layout Contents Layout Contents Slots Slots Slots Slots Slots Page Page Page Page Page 1. DDR DIMM slots 2-12 2. PCI slots 2-18 3. PCI Express slot 2-18 Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Jumpers Page Page Page Page Page 1. Clear RTC RAM (3-pin CLRTC1) 2-19 2. USB Device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) 2-20 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR1) 2-21 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. PS/2 mouse port 2-22 2. Parallel port 2-22 3. RJ-45 port 2-22 4. Rear Speaker Out port 2-22 5. Side Speaker Out port 2-22 6. Line In port 2-22 7. Line Out port 2-22 8. Microphone port 2-22 9. Center/Subwoofer port 2-22 10. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 2-23 11. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 2-23 12. Serial connector 2-23 13. S/PDIF coaxial out port 2-23 14. PS/2 keyboard port 2-23
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-5 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Page Page Page Page Page 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) 2-24 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) 2-24 3. Primary RAID ATA connector (40-1 pin PRI_RAID) 2-25 4. Secondary RAID ATA connector (40-1 pin SEC_RAID) 2-25 5. Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) 2-26 6. CPU fan connector (3-pin CPU_FAN) 2-27 7. Power fan connector (3-pin PWR_FAN) 2-27 8. Chassis fan connector (3-pin CHA_FAN) 2-27 9. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) 2-28 10. USB headers (10-1 USB56, USB78) 2-28 11. ATX power connector (24-pin EATXPWR) 2-29 12. ATX 12V power connector (4-pin ATX12V) 2-29 13. Optical audio connector (4-pin CD) 2-30 14. GAME/MIDI connector (16-1 pin GAME) 2-30 15. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) 2-31 16. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) 2-31 17. System panel connectors (20-1 pin PANEL) 2-32 - System Power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) - Hard Disk activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) - System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) - Power/Soft-off button(Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) - Reset switch (Blue 2-pin RESET)
2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Take note of the marked corner (with gold triangle) on the CPU. This mark should match a specific corner on the socket to ensure correct installation. Incorrect installation of the CPU into the socket can bend the pins and severely damage the CPU! Gold Mark Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel Notes on Intel î î î î î Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology Hyper-Threading Technology ⢠This motherboard supports Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs with Hyper-Threading Technology. ⢠Hyper-Threading Technology is supported under Windows î XP/2003 Server and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only. Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compiler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading Techonology item in BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. ⢠We recommend that you install Windows î XP Service Pack 1. ⢠Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading Technology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system ⢠For more information on Hyper-Threading Technology, visit www.intel.com/info/hyperthreading. 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with a surface mount 478-pin Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket designed for the Intel î Pentium î 4 Processor. 2.3 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Your boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-7 To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this To use the Hyper-Threading Technology on this motherboard: motherboard: motherboard: motherboard: motherboard: 1. Buy an Intel î Pentium î 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Technology. Install the CPU. 2. Power up the system and enter BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Hyper-Threading Technology Technology Technology Technology Technology i s set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading Techonology. 3. Reboot the computer. 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 2.3.2 Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Installing the CPU Follow these steps to install a CPU. 1. Locate the 478-pin ZIF socket on the motherboard. 2. Unlock the socket by pressing the lever sideways, then lift it up to a 90 ð -100 ð angle. Make sure that the socket lever is lifted up to 90 ð -100 ð angle; otherwise, the CPU does not fit in completely. Socket Lever Socket Lever Socket Lever Socket Lever Socket Lever 90 90 90 90 90 ð -100 -100 -100 -100 -100 ð angle angle angle angle angle P4GD1 P4GD1 478-pin CPU Socket
2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that its marked corner matches the base of the socket lever. 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it fits in place. The CPU fits only in one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the pins and damaging the CPU! 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. Gold Mark Gold Mark Gold Mark Gold Mark Gold Mark After installation, make sure to plug the 4-pin ATX power cable to the motherboard. This motherboard does not support unlocked Intel î Pentium î 4 CPUs.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-9 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan Installing the heatsink and fan The Intel î Pentium î 4 Processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Retention module base CPU heatsink Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink fits properly on the retention module base. ⢠When you buy a boxed Intel î Pentium î 4 processor, the package includes the heatsink, fan, and retention mechanism. ⢠If you buy a CPU separately, make sure that you use only Intel î -certified heatsink and fan. ⢠The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. ⢠You do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. If you purchased a separate CPU heatsink and fan assembly, make sure that a Thermal Interface Material is properly applied to the CPU heatsink or CPU before installing the heatsink and fan assembly.
2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Position the fan with the retention mechanism on top of the heatsink. Align and snap the four hooks of the retention mechanism to the holes on each corner of the module base. Retention hole Retention hole Retention hole Retention hole Retention hole Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped Retention hook snapped to the retention hole to the retention hole to the retention hole to the retention hole to the retention hole Retention lock Retention lock Retention lock Retention lock Retention lock Keep the retention locks lifted upward while fitting the retention mechanism to the module base. Make sure that the fan and retention mechanism assembly perfectly fits the heatsink and module base; otherwise, you cannot snap the hooks into the holes.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 2-11 4. When the fan and heatsink assembly is in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_FAN. Do not forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors can occur if you fail to plug this connector. P4GD1 P4GD1 CPU Fan connector CPU_F AN GND Rotation 12V 3. Push down the locks on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base. When secure, the retention locks should point to opposite directions.
2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4 System memory 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 2.4.1 Overview Overview Overview Overview Overview The motherboard comes with four 184-pin Double Data Rate (DDR) Dual Inline Memory Modules (DIMM) sockets. The following figure illustrates the location of the sockets: 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 2.4.2 Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations Memory Configurations You may install 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB unbuffered non-ECC DDR DIMMs into the DIMM sockets using the memory configurations in this section. P4GD1 P4GD1 184-Pin DDR DIMM Sockets DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 ⢠Installing DDR DIMMs other than the recommended configurations may cause memory sizing error or system boot failure. Use any of the recommended configurations in Table 1. ⢠In dual-channel configurations, install only identical identical identical identical identical (the same type and size) DDR DIMM pairs for each channel. ⢠Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency. For optimum compatibility, it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor. ⢠Double-sided x16 modules are not supported in this motherboard. ⢠Due to chipset resource allocation, the system may detect less than 4 GB of system memory when you installed four 1 GB DDR memory modules. ⢠Due to chipset limitation, DIMM modules with 128 Mb memory chips or double-sided x16 memory chips are not supported in this motherboard.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 2-13 Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Table 1 Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations Recommended memory configurations * For dual-channel configuration (3), you may: ⢠install identical DIMMs in all four sockets ⢠install identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 (blue sockets) and identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 (black sockets) ⢠install same size DIMMs in DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 (blue sockets) and another same size pair in DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 (black sockets) Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Sockets Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 DIMM_B2 (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (black) (black) (black) (black) (black) (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (blue) (black) (black) (black) (black) (black) Single-channel (1) P opulated â â â (2) â P opulated â â (3) â â P opulated â (4) â â â P opulated Dual-channel (1) P opulated â P opulated â (2) â P opulated â P opulated (3) *P opulated Populated P opulated Populated Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A* A* A* A* A* B* B* B* B* B* C* C* C* C* C* 256MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/256 Hynix SS HY5DU56822BT-D43 ⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/512 Hynix DS HY5DU56822BT-D43 ⢠⢠256MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/256 Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT-5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/512 Infineon DS HYB25D256809BT-5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/256 KINGSTON SS D3208DL2T-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KVR400X64C3A/512 KINGSTON DS D328DIB-50 ⢠⢠512MB KINGSTON KHX3200A/512 N/A DS Heat-Sink Package ⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M368L3223ETM-CCC SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M368L3223FTN-CCC SAMSUNG SS K4H560838F-TCCC ⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M368L6423FTN-CCC SAMSUNG DS K4H560838F-TCCC ⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMD264646B8J-D43 AA Hynix DS HY5DU56822BT-D43 ⢠⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT8VDDT3264AG-40BCB MICRON SS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠512MB MICRON MT16VDDT6464AG-40BCB MICRON DS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64D32300GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT-5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64D64320GU-5-B Infineon DS HYB25D256800BT-5B ⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64D32300HU-5-C Infineon SS HYB25D256800CE-5C ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64D64320HU-5-C Infineon DS HYB25D256800CE-5C ⢠⢠⢠256MB CORSAIR CMX256A-3200C2PT Winbond SS W942508BH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB CORSAIR CMX512-3200C2 Winbond DS Heat-Sink Package ⢠⢠⢠512MB CORSAIR VS512MB400 VALUE seLecT DS VS32M8-5 ⢠⢠256MB GEIL GE2563200B GEIL SS GL3LC32G88TG-5A ⢠⢠⢠512MB GEIL GE5123200B GEIL DS GL3LC32G88TG-5A ⢠⢠512MB GEIL GE5123200B GEIL DS GL3LC32G88TG-5A ⢠⢠⢠256MB GEIL GD3200-256V GEIL SS GLIL DDR 32M8 ⢠⢠⢠512MB GEIL GD3200-512V GEIL DS GLIL DDR 32M8 ⢠⢠⢠(Continued on the next page)
2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support DIMM support Size Size Size Size Size Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Vendor Model Model Model Model Model Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Brand Side(s) Component Component Component Component Component A* A* A* A* A* B* B* B* B* B* C* C* C* C* C* 256MB TwinMOS M2S9I08AFAPS9F0811A-T PSC SS A2S56D30ATP ⢠⢠⢠256MB TwinMOS M2G9I08AIATT9F081AADT TwinMOS SS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠⢠512MB TwinMOS M2G9J16AJATT9F081AADT TwinMOS DS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠256MB Transcend TS32MLD64V4F3 Mosel SS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠512MB Transcend TS64MLD64V4F3 Mosel DS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Transcend TS32MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠512MB Transcend TS64MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠256MB A DATA MDOSS6F3G31Y0K1E0Z SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB A DATA MDOSS6F3H41Y0N1E0Z SAMSUNG DS K4H560838F-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB A DATA MDOHY6F3G31Y0N1E0Z Hynix SS HY5DU56822CT-D43 ⢠⢠⢠512MB A DATA MDOHY6F3H41Y0N1E0Z Hynix DS HY5DU56822CT-D43 ⢠⢠⢠256MB A DATA MDOAD5F3G31Y0D1E02 N/A SS ADD8608A8A-5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB A DATA MDOAD5F3H41Y0D1E02 N/A DS ADD8608A8A-5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Winbond W9425GCDB-5 Winbond SS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Winbond W9451GCDB-5 Winbond DS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB PSC AL5D8B53T-5B1K PSC SS A2S56D30BTP ⢠⢠⢠512MB PSC AL6D8B53T-5B1K PSC DS A2S56D30BTP ⢠⢠256MB KINGMAX MPXB62D-38KT3R KINGMAX SS KDL388P4EA-50 ⢠⢠⢠512MB KINGMAX MPXC22D-38KT3R KINGMAX DS KDL388P4EA-50 ⢠⢠⢠1024MB ATP AG28L64T8SMC4M MICRON DS MT46V64M4TG-5BC ⢠⢠256MB NANYA NT256D64S88B1G-5T NANYA SS NT5DS32M8BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠512MB NANYA N512D64S8HB1G-5T NANYA DS NT5DS32M8BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠256MB BRAIN POWER B6U808-256M-SAM-400 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB BRAIN POWER B6U808-512M-SAM-400 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠256MB CENTURY DXV6S8SSCCD3K27C SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB CENTURY DXV2S8SSCCD3K27C SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB CENTURY DXV6S8SSCCE3K27E SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB CENTURY DXV2S8SSCCE3K27E SAMSUNG DS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB CENTURY DXV6S8MC5BC3U27E MICRON SS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠⢠512MB CENTURY DXV2S8MC5BC3U27E MICRON DS MT46V32M8TG-5BC ⢠⢠⢠256MB elixir M2U25664DS88B3G-5T NANYA SS N2DS25680BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠512MB elixir M2U25664DS8HB3G-5T NANYA DS N2DS25680BT-5T ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kreton N/A VT SS VT3225804T-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Kreton N/A VT DS VT3225804T-5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Veritech VT400FMV/2561103 VT SS VT56DD32M8PC-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Veritech VT400FMV/5121003 VT DS VT56DD32M8PC-5 ⢠⢠256MB Pmi MD44256VIT3208GMHA01 MOSEL SS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB Pmi MD44512VIT3208GATA03 MOSEL DS V58C2256804SAT5B ⢠⢠⢠Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Side(s): SS - Single Sided DS - DS - DS - DS - DS - Double Sided DIMM Support: DIMM Support: DIMM Support: DIMM Support: DIMM Support: A A A A A - supports one module inserted into either slot, in a Single-channel memory configuration. B B B B B - supports on pair of modules inserted into either the yellow slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration. C C C C C - support for 4 modules inserted into the yellow and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 Table 2 DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List DDR400 Qualified Vendors List Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) for the latest Qualified Vendors List.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2-15 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 2.4.4 Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 2.4.3 Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM Installing a DIMM 3. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 1. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 2. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Locked Retaining Clip Make sure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. A DDR DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip Unlocked retaining clip DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1 DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch DDR DIMM notch 1 2 1
2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 2.5.1 Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card Installing an expansion card To install an expansion card: 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier. 6. Replace the system cover. 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 2.5.2 Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure it by adjusting the software settings. 1. Turn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any. See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2-17 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 2.5.3 Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments Standard interrupt assignments IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ IRQ Priority Priority Priority Priority Priority Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function Standard Function 01 System Timer 12 Keyboard Controller 2â Re-direct to IRQ#9 31 1 Communications Port (COM2)* 41 2 Communications Port (COM1)* 51 3 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 61 4 Floppy Disk Controller 71 5 Printer Port (LPT1)* 83 System CMOS/Real Time Clock 94 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 10 5 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 11 6 IRQ holder for PCI steering* 12 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port* 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14 9 Primary IDE Channel 15 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard IRQ assignments for this motherboard A A A A A B B B B B C C C C C D D D D D E E E E E F F F F F G G G G G H H H H H PCI slot 1 â â â â â â used â PCI slot 2 â â â â â used â â PCI slot 3 â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x1 slot 1 shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x1 slot 2 â â shared â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x1 slot 3 â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ PCI E x16 slot shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 1 â â â â â â â shared Onboard USB controller 2 â â â shared âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 3 â â shared â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB controller 4 shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard USB 2.0 controller â â â â â â â shared Onboard LAN â shared â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard audio shared â â â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ Onboard PCI IDE RAID (ITE) âÂÂâ âÂÂâ used â â â When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âÂÂShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 2.5.4 PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots PCI slots The PCI slots support cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 2.5.5 PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot PCI Express x16 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x16 graphic cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The figure shows a graphics card installed on the PCI Express x16 slot. 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 2.5.6 PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot PCI Express x1 slot This motherboard supports PCI Express x1 network cards, SCSI cards and other cards that comply with the PCI Express specifications. The figure shows a network card installed on the PCI Express x1 slot.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19 2.6 Jumpers 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC) This jumper allows you to clear the Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. You can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The onboard button cell battery powers the RAM data in CMOS, which include system setup information such as system passwords. To erase the RTC RAM: 1. Turn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery. 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Re-install the battery. 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer. 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! You do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P.R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so the BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values. P4GD1 P4GD1 Clear RTC RAM CLRTC Normal Clear CMOS (Default) 12 23
2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) USBPW56, USBPW78) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S3 and S4 sleep modes (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). The USBPWR12 and USBPWR34 jumpers are for the rear USB ports. The USBPWR56 and USBPWR78 jumper is for the internal USB connectors that you can connect to additional USB ports. ⢠The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port; otherwise, the system would not power up. ⢠The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode. P4GD1 3 2 2 1 P4GD1 USB device wake-up 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW56 USBPW78 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW12 USBPW34
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default is the Space Bar). This feature requires an ATX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead, and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. P4GD1 P4GD1 Keyboard power setting (Default) 5V 5VSB KBPWR 23 12
2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Connectors 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 2.7.1 Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors Rear panel connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). PS/2 mouse port (green). This port is for a PS/2 mouse. 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer, a scanner, or other devices. 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. LAN (RJ-45) port. This port allows Gigabit connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Refer to the table below for the LAN port LED indications. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). Rear Speaker Out port (gray). This port connects the rear speakers on a 4-channel, 6-channel, or 8-channel audio configuration. 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). Side Speaker Out port (black). This port connects the side speakers in an 8-channel audio configuration. 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). Line In port (light blue). This port connects a tape, CD, DVD player, or other audio sources. 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). Line Out port (lime). This port connects a headphone or a speaker. In 4-channel, 6-channel, and 8-channel configuration, the function of this port becomes Front Speaker Out. 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). Microphone port (pink). This port connects a microphone. 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). Center/Subwoofer port (yellow orange). This port connects the center/subwoofer speakers. SPEED LED ACT/LINK LED LAN port LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications LAN port LED indications ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED ACT/LINK LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED SPEED LED Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description Status Status Status Status Status Description Description Description Description Description OFF No link OFF 10 Mbps connection GREEN Linked ORANGE 100 Mbps connection BLINKING Data activity GREEN 1 Gbps connection 1 14 10 2 3 12 13 6 7 8 45 9 11
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 2-23 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Serial connector. Serial connector. Serial connector. Serial connector. Serial connector. This 9-pin COM1 port is for serial devices. 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. S/PDIF Out port. This port connects an external audio output device via a coaxial S/PDIF cable. 14. 14. 14. 14. 14. PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). PS/2 keyboard port (purple). This port is for a PS/2 keyboard. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray ⢠Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black ⢠⢠⢠Side Speaker Out Yellow Orange ⢠⢠Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port Headset Headset Headset Headset Headset 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel Refer to the audio configuration table for the function of the audio ports in 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration.
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. 2. 2. 2. 2. Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) Primary IDE connector (40-1 pin PRI_IDE) This connector is for an Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable. The Ultra DMA 100/66 signal cable has three connectors: a blue connector for the primary IDE connector on the motherboard, a black connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE slave device (optical drive/hard disk drive), and a gray connector for an Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE master device (hard disk drive). If you install two hard disk drives, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly. Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 2.7.2 Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors Internal connectors 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY) This connector is for the provided floppy disk drive (FDD) signal cable. Insert one end of the cable to this connector, then connect the other end to the signal connector at the back of the floppy disk drive. Pin 5 on the connector is removed to prevent incorrect cable connection when using an FDD cable with a covered Pin 5. ⢠Pin 20 on the IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the Ultra DMA cable connector. This prevents incorrect insertion when you connect the IDE cable. ⢠Use the 80-conductor IDE cable for Ultra DMA 100/66 IDE devices. P4GD1 NOTE: Orient the red markings on the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P4GD1 Floppy disk drive connector PIN 1 FLOPPY P4GD1 P4GD1 IDE connector NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_IDE PIN 1
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 2-25 3. 3. 3. 3. 3. IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors IDE RAID connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) (40-1 pin PRI_RAID [blue], SEC_RAID [black]) These connectors are for Ultra ATA 133/100/66 signal cables. These connectors support up to four IDE hard disk drives that can be configured as a disk array through the onboard IDE RAID controller. Refer to Chapter 5 for details on how to set up RAID configurations. ⢠Before creating a RAID set using Ultra ATA hard disks, make sure that you have connected the Ultra ATA signal cable and installed Ultra ATA 133/100/66 hard disk drives. ⢠The system automatically assigns the boot sequence of ATAPI devices connected to the IDE RAID connectors. ⢠The ITE î 8212F controller supports a maximum of 2 Ultra ATA hard disk drives. ⢠Set both drives either as Master or Slave before configuring a RAID 1 set. These connectors are set to IDE mode by default. In IDE mode, you can connect IDE devices to these connectors such as boot/data hard disk drives or optical drives. If you intend to create an IDE RAID set using these connectors, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item in the BIOS to RAID Mode. See section âÂÂ4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configurationâ for details. P4GD1 P4GD1 RAID connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE cable to PIN 1. PRI_RAID SEC_RAID
2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors Serial ATA connectors (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) (7-pin SATA1, SATA2, SATA3, SATA4) These connectors are for the Serial ATA signal cables for Serial ATA hard disk drives. The current Serial ATA interface allows up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate, faster than the standard parallel ATA with 133 MB/s (UltraDMA 133) Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA Important notes on Serial ATA ⢠Install the Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack1 before using Serial ATA. ⢠Plug your Serial ATA boot disk on the master port (SATA1 and SATA2) to support S3 function. Refer to the table below for details. Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Serial ATA Master/Slave connectors Connector Connector Connector Connector Connector Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Use Use Use Use Use SATA1, SATA2 Master Boot disk SATA3, SATA4 Slave Data disk P4GD1 P4GD1 SA T A connectors S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND S ATA 4 GND RSA T A_TXP4 RSA T A_TXN4 GND RSA T A_RXP4 RSA T A_RXN4 GND S ATA 3 GND RSA T A_TXP3 RSA T A_TXN3 GND RSA T A_RXP3 RSA T A_RXN3 GND S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 2-27 5. 5. 5. 5. 5. CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors CPU, Chassis, and Power fan connectors (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) (3-pin CPU_FAN, 3-pin PWR_FAN, 3-pin CHA_FAN) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350mA~740mA (8.88W max.) or a total of 1A~2.22A (26.64W max.) at 12V. Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector. Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Insufficient air flow inside the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors. P4GD1 P4GD1 Fan connectors CPU_F AN CHA_F AN PWR_F AN GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V
2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. 6. 6. 6. 6. Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) Serial port connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector is for a serial (COM) port. Connect the serial port module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. Never connect a 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable 1394 cable t o the USB connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! 7. 7. 7. 7. 7. USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) USB connectors (10-1 pin USB56, USB78) These connectors are for USB 2.0 ports. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to any of these connectors, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. These USB connectors comply with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. The Serial connector (COM2) module is purchased separately. P4GD1 P4GD1 Serial port connectors PIN 1 COM2 P4GD1 P4GD1 USB 2.0 connectors USB56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 2-29 8. 8. 8. 8. 8. ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, ATX power connectors (24-pin EATXPWR, 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) 4-pin ATX12V) These connectors are for an ATX power supply. The plugs from the power supply are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. ⢠It is recommended that you use an ATX 12 V Specification 2.0-compliant power supply unit (PSU) with a minimum of 300 W power rating. This PSU type has 24-pin and 4-pin power plugs. ⢠If you intend to use a PSU with 20-pin and 4-pin power plugs, make sure that the 20-pin power plug can provide at least 15A on 12V and that the PSU has a minimum power rating of 300 W. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠Do not forget to connect the 4-pin ATX 12 V power plug; otherwise, the system will not boot up. ⢠Use of a PSU with a higher power output is recommended when configuring a system with more power-consuming devices. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate. ⢠The ATX 12 V Specification 2.0-compliant PSU passed the motherboard power requirement test with the following configuration: CPU : Intel î Pentium î 4 3.4 GHz Memory : 512 MB DDR (x 4) Grpahics card : PCI Express x16 Nvidia EN5900 Parallel ATA devices : IDE hard disk drive (x 2) Serial ATA device : SATA hard disk drive Optical drives : CD-ROM (x 2) SCSI devices : SCSI card and SCSI hard disk drive ⢠You must install a PSU with a higher power rating if you intend to install additional devices. P4GD1 P4GD1 A TX power connectors EA TXPWR A TX12V 3 V olts 3 V olts Ground 5 V olts 5 V olts Ground Ground Power OK 5V Standby 12 V olts -5 V olts 5 V olts 3 V olts -12 V olts Ground Ground Ground PSON# Ground 5 V olts 12 V olts 3 V olts 5 V olts Ground 12V DC GND 12V DC GND
2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. 9. 9. 9. 9. Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) Optical drive audio connector (4-pin CD) This connector is for the 4-pin audio cable that connects to the audio connector at the back of the optical drive. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) GAME/MIDI port connector (16-1 pin GAME) This connector is for a GAME/MIDI port. Connect the USB/GAME module cable to this connector, then install the module to a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. The GAME/MIDI port connects a joystick or game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P4GD1 P4GD1 CD audio connector CD Right Audio Channel Left Audio Channel Ground Ground P4GD1 P4GD1 GAME connector GAME 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 2-31 11. 11. 11. 11. 11. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS) This connector is for a chassis-mounted intrusion detection sensor or switch. Connect one end of the chassis intrusion sensor or switch cable to this connector. The chassis intrusion sensor or switch sends a high-level signal to this connector when a chassis component is removed or replaced. The signal is then generated as a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âÂÂChassis Signalâ and âÂÂGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. Remove the jumper caps only when you intend to use the chassis intrusion detection feature. 12. 12. 12. 12. 12. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin AAFP) This connector is for a chassis-mounted front panel audio I/O module that supports either HD Audio or legacy AC âÂÂ97 audio standard. Connect one end of the front panel audio I/O module cable to this connector. Connect a high-definiton front panel audio module to this connector to avail the high-definition audio features of the motherboard. P4GD1 P4GD1 Chassis intrusion connector CHASSIS 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default) P4GD1 P4GD1 Analog front panel connector AAFP Legacy ACâÂÂ97 compliant definition Azalia compliant definition SENSE2_RETUR PORT1 L PORT2 R PORT2 L SENSE1_RETUR SENSE_SEND PORT1 R PRESENCE# GND BLINE_OUT_L MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L BLINE_OUT_R NC MICPWR 5V A AGND
2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information Chapter 2: Hardware information 13. 13. 13. 13. 13. System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) System panel connector (20-1 pin PANEL) This connector supports several chassis-mounted functions. The sytem panel connector is color-coded for easy connection. Refer to the connector description below for details. ⢠System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) System power LED (Green 3-pin PLED) This 3-pin connector is for the system power LED. Connect the chassis power LED cable to this connector. The system power LED lights up when you turn on the system power, and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) Hard disk drive activity (Red 2-pin IDE_LED) This 2-pin connector is for the HDD Activity LED. Connect the HDD Activity LED cable to this connector. The IDE LED lights up or flashes when data is read from or written to the HDD. ⢠System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) System warning speaker (Orange 4-pin SPEAKER) This 4-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted system warning speaker. The speaker allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) Power/Soft-off button (Yellow 2-pin PWRSW) This connector is for the system power button. Pressing the power button turns the system ON or puts the system in SLEEP or SOFT-OFF mode depending on the BIOS settings. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds while the system is ON turns the system OFF. ⢠Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) Reset button (Blue 2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector is for the chassis-mounted reset button for system reboot without turning off the system power. P4GD1 P4GD1 System Panel Connector P ANEL PLED- PWR 5V Speaker SPEAKER PLED Ground Reset Ground Reset Ground Ground PWR SW PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE LED
3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence, the vocal POST messages, and ways of shutting down the system.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 Powering off the computer .................................................. 3-2
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3.1 Starting up for the first time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover. 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector. 5. Turn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power, the system power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For systems withATX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the ATX power button. If your monitor complies with âÂÂgreenâ standards or if it has a âÂÂpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on self tests or POST. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps (see BIOS beep codes table below) or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power, the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes AMI BIOS beep codes Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Beep Description Error Error Error Error Error One beep Keyboard controller error Refresh Time error No master drive detected Two continuous beeps followed by Floppy controller failure two short beeps Two continuous beeps followed by Hardware component failure four short beeps 7. At power on, hold down the <Delete> key to enter the BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 Powering off the computer 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 3.2.1 Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function Using the OS shut down function If you are using Windows î 2000: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then click Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... Shut Down... 2. Make sure that the Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down Shut Down option button is selected, then click the OK OK OK OK OK button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. If you are using Windows î XP: 1. Click the Start Start Start Start Start button then select Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. Turn Off Computer. 2. Click the Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off Turn Off button to shut down the computer. 3. The power supply should turn off after Windows î shuts down. 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than four seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than four seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. Refer to section âÂÂ4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4 for details.
4 BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change the system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS ........................................ 4-1 4.2 BIOS setup program ........................................................... 4-10 4.3 Main menu .......................................................................... 4-13 4.4 Advanced menu .................................................................. 4-17 4.5 Power menu ........................................................................ 4-28 4.6 Boot menu .......................................................................... 4-33 4.7 Exit menu ........................................................................... 4-37
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS The following utilities allow you to manage and update the motherboard Basic Input/Output System (BIOS) setup. 1. ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS ASUS AFUDOS (Updates the BIOS in DOS mode using a bootable floppy disk.) 2. ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash ASUS EZ Flash (Updates the BIOS using a floppy disk during POST.) 3. ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 (Updates the BIOS using a bootable floppy disk or the motherboard support CD when the BIOS file fails or gets corrupted.) 4. ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update (Updates the BIOS in Windows î environment.) Refer to the corresponding sections for details on these utilities. 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment a. Insert a 1.44MB floppy disk into the drive. b. At the DOS prompt, type format A:/S then press <Enter>. Windows î XP environment a. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. b. Click Start Start Start Start Start from the Windows î desktop, then select My My My My My Computer Computer Computer Computer Computer . c. Select the 3 1/2 Floppy Drive icon. d. Click File File File File File from the menu, then select Format Format Format Format Format . A Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Format 3 1/2 Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk Floppy Disk window appears. e. Select Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk Create an MS-DOS startup disk from the format options field, then click Start Start Start Start Start . Windows î 2000 environment To create a set of boot disks for Windows î 2000: a. Insert a formatted, high density 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. b. Insert the Windows î 2000 CD to the optical drive. c. Click Start Start Start Start Start , then select Run Run Run Run Run . Save a copy of the original motherboard BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future. Copy the original motherboard BIOS using the ASUS Update or AFUDOS utilities.
4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup d. From the Open field, type D:\bootdisk\makeboot a: assuming that D: is your optical drive. e. Press <Enter>, then follow screen instructions to continue. 2. Copy the original or the latest motherboard BIOS file to the bootable floppy disk. 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 4.1.2 ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility ASUS EZ Flash utility The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a floppy disk and using a DOS-based utility. The EZ Flash utility is built-in the BIOS chip so it is accessible by pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self Tests (POST). To update the BIOS using EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard and rename the same to P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM . 2. Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk, then restart the system. 3. Press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. When the correct BIOS file is found, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. EZFlash starting BIOS update Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP4GD1.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start erasing.......| Start programming...| Flashed successfully. Rebooting. ⢠Do not shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! â¢A âÂÂFloppy not found!â error message appears if there is no floppy disk in the drive. A âÂÂP4GD1.ROM not found!â error message appears if the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk. Make sure that you rename the BIOS file to P4GD1.ROM.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 4.1.3 AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility AFUDOS utility The AFUDOS utility allows you to update the BIOS file in DOS environment using a bootable floppy disk with the updated BIOS file. This utility also allows you to copy the current BIOS file that you can use as backup when the BIOS fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS Copying the current BIOS To copy the current BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: The utility returns to the DOS prompt after copying the current BIOS file. 3. Press <Enter>. The utility copies the current BIOS file to the floppy disk. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done A:\> Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Main filename Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name Extension name 1. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 2. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /o[filename] where the [filename] is any user-assigned filename not more than eight alphanumeric characters for the main filename and three alphanumeric characters for the extension name. A:\>afudos /oOLDBIOS1.ROM ⢠Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and has at least 600 KB free space to save the file. ⢠The succeeding BIOS screens are for reference only. The actual BIOS screen displays may not be exactly the same as shown.
4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 5. The utility returns to the DOS prompt after the BIOS update process is completed. Reboot the system from the hard disk drive. A:\>afudos /iP4GD1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) Verifying flash .. done A:\> 2. Copy the AFUDOS utility (afudos.exe) from the motherboard support CD to the bootable floppy disk you created earlier. 3. Boot the system in DOS mode, then at the prompt type: afudos /i[filename] where [filename] is the latest or the original BIOS file on the bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP4GD1.ROM AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file Updating the BIOS file To update the BIOS file using the AFUDOS utility: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) and download the latest BIOS file for the motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. A:\>afudos /iP4GD1.ROM 4. The utility verifies the file and starts updating the BIOS. Do not shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS to prevent system boot failure! Write the BIOS filename on a piece of paper. You need to type the exact BIOS filename at the DOS prompt.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 4.1.4 ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 utility The ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 is an auto recovery tool that allows you to restore the BIOS file when it fails or gets corrupted during the updating process. You can update a corrupted BIOS file using the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk that contains the updated BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk Recovering the BIOS from a floppy disk To recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Turn on the system. 2. Insert the floppy disk with the original or updated BIOS file to the floppy disk drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âÂÂP4GD1.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When found, the utility reads the BIOS file and starts flashing the corrupted BIOS file. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! ⢠Prepare the motherboard support CD or the floppy disk containing the updated motherboard BIOS before using this utility. ⢠Make sure that you rename the original or updated BIOS file in the floppy disk to P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM P4GD1.ROM .
4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD Recovering the BIOS from the support CD To recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Remove any floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, then turn on the system. 2. Insert the support CD to the optical drive. 3. The utility displays the following message and automatically checks the floppy disk for the original or updated BIOS file. 4. Restart the system after the utility completes the updating process. DO NOT shut down or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so can cause system boot failure! Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found! Reading file âÂÂP4GD1.ROMâÂÂ. Completed. Start flashing... When no floppy disk is found, the utility automatically checks the optical drive for the original or updated BIOS file. The utility then updates the corrupted BIOS file. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy...
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 4-7 Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update Installing ASUS Update To install ASUS Update: 1. Place the support CD in the optical drive. The Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears. 2. Click the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities tab, then click Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update Install ASUS Update VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX VX.XX.XX . See page 5-3 for the Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities Utilities screen menu. 3. The ASUS Update utility is copied to your system. 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 4.1.5 ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility ASUS Update utility The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to manage, save, and update the motherboard BIOS in Windows î environment. The ASUS Update utility allows you to: ⢠Save the current BIOS file ⢠Download the latest BIOS file from the Internet ⢠Update the BIOS from an updated BIOS file ⢠Update the BIOS directly from the Internet, and ⢠View the BIOS version information. This utility is available in the support CD that comes with the motherboard package. ASUS Update requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Quit all Windows î applications before you update the BIOS using this utility.
4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 3. Select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or click Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select Auto Select . Click Next Next Next Next Next . Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet Updating the BIOS through the Internet To update the BIOS through the Internet: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . T h e ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from Update BIOS from the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet the Internet option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next .
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-9 Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file Updating the BIOS through a BIOS file To update the BIOS through a BIOS file: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start Start Start Start Start > Programs Programs Programs Programs Programs > ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS ASUS > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate > ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate ASUSUpdate . The ASUS Update main window appears. 2. Select Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a Update BIOS from a file file file file file option from the drop-down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. The ASUS Update utility is capable of updating itself through the Internet. Always update the utility to avail all its features. 3. Locate the BIOS file from the Open Open Open Open Open window, then click Save Save Save Save Save . 4. Follow the screen instructions to complete the update process.
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.2 BIOS setup program This motherboard supports a programmable firmware chip that you can update using the provided utility described in section â 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âÂÂRun SetupâÂÂ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility. Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you can change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you can enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility. When you start up the computer, the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Del> during the Power-On-Self-Test (POST) to enter the Setup utility; otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST, restart the system by pressing <Ctrl Alt Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. You can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. Being a menu-driven program, it lets you scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. ⢠The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability. Select the Load Load Load Load Load Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section âÂÂ4.7 Exit Menu.â â¢ The BIOS setup screens shown in this section are for reference purposes only, and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. ⢠Visit the ASUS website (www.asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for this motherboard and .
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 4.2.2 Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main Main Main Main Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power Power Power Power Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot Boot Boot Boot Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit Exit Exit Exit Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen BIOS menu screen To select an item on the menu bar, press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys General help General help General help General help General help Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Menu bar Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 4.2.3 Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings.
4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 4.2.4 Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main Main Main Main Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power, Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 4.2.5 Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items Sub-menu items A solid triangle before each item on any menu screen means that the item has a sub-menu. To display the sub-menu, select the item and press <Enter>. 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 4.2.6 Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user-configurable, you can change the value of the field opposite the item. You cannot select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. To change the value of a field, select it then press <Enter> to display a list of options. Refer to âÂÂ4.2.7 Pop-up window.â 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 4.2.7 Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Select a menu item then press <Enter> to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 4.2.8 Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press the Up/Down arrow keys or <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 4.2.9 General help General help General help General help General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Main menu items Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window Pop-up window
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4-13 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears, giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 4.3.1 System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] System Time [xx:xx:xxxx] Allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] Allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5 in.] 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 4.3.4 Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Language [English] Allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the options. Configuration options: [Français] [German] [English] Refer to section âÂÂ4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them. System Time [11:51:19] System Date [Thu 05/07/2004] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master : [ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Third IDE Master : [Not Detected] Third IDE Slave : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master : [Not Detected] Fourth IDE Slave : [Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 4.3.5 Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave Primary, Third and Fourth IDE Master/Slave While entering Setup, the BIOS automatically detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press <Enter> to display the IDE device information. The BIOS automatically detects the values opposite the dimmed items (Device, Vendor, Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMART monitoring). These values are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Type [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to Auto allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select CDROM if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select ARMD (ATAPI Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP, LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to Auto enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Block (Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to Auto, the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to [Disabled], the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Primary IDE Master Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Type [Auto] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Block(Multi-sector Transfer) [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] Smart Monitoring [Auto] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-15 PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] SMART Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] 32Bit Data Transfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 4.3.6 IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press <Enter> if you wish to configure the item. IDE Configuration Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the operating system (OS) that you installed. Set to Enhanced Mode if you are using native OS, such as Windows î 2000/XP. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] The default setting S-ATA allows you to use native OS on Serial ATA and Parallel ATA ports. We recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility. In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel ATA ports only if only if only if only if only if you did not install any Serial ATA device.
4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 4.3.7 System Information System Information System Information System Information System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The BIOS automatically detects the items in this menu. AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS AMI BIOS Displays the auto-detected BIOS information Processor Processor Processor Processor Processor Displays the auto-detected CPU specification System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory System Memory Displays the auto-detected system memory AMIBIOS Version : 08.00.10 Build Date : 06/30/04 Processor Type : Intel(R) Pentium(R) CPU 3.40GHz Speed : 2800 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 512MB The P-ATA S-ATA and P-ATA options are for advanced users only. If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA S-ATA . Configuration options: [P-ATA S-ATA] [S-ATA] [P-ATA] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] IDE Detect Time Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting ATA/ATAPI devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-17 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Configure CPU. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit JumperFree Configuration LAN Cable Status USB Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCI PnP 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration JumperFree Configuration AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] AI Overclocking [Auto] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency. Select either one of the preset overclocking options. Configuration options: [Manual] [Auto] [Standard] [Overclock Profile] [ AI NOS] Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclocking [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Select the target CPU frequency, and the relevant parameters will be auto-adjusted. Frequencies higher than CPU manufacturer recommends are not guaranteed to be stable. If the system becomes unstable, return to the default.
4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [Turbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Turbo] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Overclock Options [Overclock 5%] Allows you to set the oveclocking options. Configuration options: [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] [FSB900/DDR-450] [FSB1000/DDR-500] [FSB1066/DDR-445] [FSB1066/DDR-533] The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [Overclock Profile]. The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI N.O.S.]. N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] N.O.S Mode [Auto] Sets the Non-Delay Overclocking System mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [Sensitive] [Heavy Load] The following item appears only when the N.O.S Mode item is set to [Standard], [Sensitive], or [Heavy]. Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Disables or sets the turbo non-delay overclocking system percentage. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Twin Turbo N.O.S. [Disabled] Disables or sets the twin turbo non-delay overclocking system percentage. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Overclock 3%] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 7%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 15%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-19 Selecting a very high CPU frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Table 4.4.2 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency CPU External Frequency FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz FSB 400 100 MHz FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] FSB Termination Voltage [Auto] Sets the Front Side Bus (FSB) termination voltage. Configuration options: [1.20V] [1.40V] [Auto] CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) CPU Frequency [XXX] (value is auto-detected) Indicates the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The bus frequency (external frequency) multiplied by the bus multiple equals the CPU speed. The value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the following table for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. Use the < > and <-> keys to adjust the value. Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU VCore voltage. A very high Vcore voltage can severely damage the CPU! Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Chipset Core Voltage [Auto] Allows selection of the chipset core voltage. Configuration options: [1.50V] [1.60V] [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] CPU VCore Voltage [Auto] Allows selection of the CPU VCore voltage. The configuration options vary depending on the CPU installed. Setting to Auto allows the BIOS to detect the VCore voltage of the CPU installed. The following item appears only when the AI Overclocking item is set to [AI N.O.S.] or [Manual]. Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Memory Voltage [Auto] Allows selection of the DDR SDRAM operating voltage. Set to Auto for safe mode. Configuration options: [2.60V] [2.70V] [2.80V] [2.90V] [Auto] Refer to the DDR documentation before setting the memory voltage. Setting a very high memory voltage may damage the memory module(s)!
4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 4.4.2 LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status LAN Cable Status The items in this menu displays the status of the Local Area Network (LAN) cable. POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] LAN Cable Status Pair Status Length 1-2 Open 0.0M 3-6 Open 0.0M 4-5 Open 0.0M 7-8 Open 0.0M POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] POST Check LAN cable [Disabled] Enables or disables checking of the LAN cable during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] PCI Express Frequency [Auto] Sets the PCI Express frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [90] ~ [133] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] PCI Clock Synchronization Mode [Auto] Selects the PCI Clock Synchronization mode. Configuration options: [To CPU] [33.33MHz] [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Spread Spectrum [Auto] Enables, disables or set to Auto the clock generator spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency. Configuration options: [Auto] [333 MHz] [400 MHz] [600 MHz] Selecting a DRAM frequency that is not supported by your DIMM module may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. See page 2-14 for qualified DDR DIMMs.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 4-21 USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] USB Function [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB function. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for USB devices on legacy operating systems (OS). Setting to Auto allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to set the USB 2.0 controller mode to HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or FullSpeed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [FullSpeed] [HiSpeed] The Module Version and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto-detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 4.4.3 USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. USB Configuration Module Version - 2.23.2-9.4 USB Devices Enabled: None USB Function [Enabled] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed]
4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 4.4.4 CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information that the BIOS automatically detects. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Configure Advanced CPU settings Manufacturer: Intel Brand String: Genuine Intel(R) CPU 3.20GHz Frequency : 3400 MHz FSB Speed : 800 MHz Cache L1 : 8 KB Cache L2 : 512 KB Cache L3 : 2048 KB Ratio Status: Unlocked Ratio Actual Value : 14 Ratio CMOS Setting: [ 8] VID CMOS Setting: [ 45] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit: [Disabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Sets the ratio between CPU Core Clock and the FSB Frequency. NOTE: If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS then actual and setpoint values may differ. Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Ratio CMOS Setting [ 8] Sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus frequency. The default value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS. Use the < > or <-> keys to adjust the values. VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] VID CMOS Setting [ 45] Allows you to set the VID CMOS setting at which the processor is to run. The default value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS. Use the < > < > < > < > < > o r <-> keys to adjust the values. Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Microcode Updation [Enabled] Enables or disables the Microcode Updation feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Max CPUID Value Limit [Disabled] Enable this item to boot legacy operating systems that cannot support CPUs with extended CPUID functions. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] Enhanced C1 Control [Auto] When set to [Auto], the BIOS will automatically check the CPUâÂÂs capability to enable the C1E support. In C1E mode, the CPU power consumption is lower when idle. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4-23 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 4.4.5 Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset Chipset The Chipset menu allows you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] CPU Internal Thermal Control [Auto] Disables or sets the CPU internal thermal control. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Hyper-Threading Technology [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading Technology. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Hyper-Path 2 [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Advanced Chipset Settings Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. The following sub-items appear when this item is Disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] DRAM CAS# Latency [3 Clocks] Controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [3 Clocks] [2.5 Clocks] [2 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] Controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] Controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks]
4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup DRAM RAS# Activate to Precharge [15 Clocks] Sets the RAS Activate timing to Precharge timing. Configuration options: [1 Clock] [2 Clocks] ~ [15 Clocks] DRAM Write Recovery Time [4 Clocks] Sets the DRAM Write Recover Time. Configuration options: [2 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [4 Clocks] [5 Clocks] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Hyper Path 2 [Auto] Enables or disables the memory acceleration mode feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Booting Graphic Adapter Priority [PCI Express/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [Internal VGA] [PCI Express/Int-VGA] [PCI Express/PCI] [PCI/PCI Express] [PCI/Int-VGA] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] PEG Buffer Length [Auto] Sets the PCI Express Graphics card buffer length. Configuration options: [Auto] [Long] [Short] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Link Latency [Auto] Sets the link latency. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] PEG Link Mode [Auto] Sets the PCI Express Graphics link mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [Slow] [Normal] [Fast] [Faster] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] PEG Root Control [Auto] Enables or disables the PCI Express Graphics root control. Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Slot Power [Auto] Sets the slot operating power. Configuration options: [Auto] [Light] [Normal] [Heavy] [Heavier]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4-25 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 4.4.6 Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Onboard Devices Configuration Configure Win627EHF Super IO Chipset Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Onboard High Definition Codec [Enabled] Enables or disables the onboard High-Definition Audio CODEC. Configuration options: [Enabled] [Disabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] OnBoard PCIEX GbE LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard PCI Express Gigabit LAN controller. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] LAN Option ROM [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller. This item appears only when the Onboard LAN item is set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] ITE8212F Controller [IDE Mode] Allows you to set the onboard ITE î 8212F RAID controller operating mode. Configuration options: [RAID Mode] [IDE Mode] [Disabled] Detecting Device Time [Quick Mode] Sets the ITE8212F detecting device time. If the devices installed on the IDE RAID connectors cannot be detected, set this item to Standard Mode to enable complete detecting process. This item appears only when the ITE8212F Controller is set to IDE Mode. Configuration options: [Standard Mode] [Quick Mode] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3]
4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Appears only when the Parallel Port Mode is set to [ECP]. This item allows you to set the Parallel Port ECP DMA. Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] EPP Version [1.9] Allows selection of the Parallel Port EPP version. This item appears only when the Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode Parallel Port Mode i s set to EPP EPP EPP EPP EPP . Configuration options: [1.9] [1.7] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330] MIDI IRQ Select [IRQ10] Sets MIDI port IRQ address. Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ10] [IRQ11]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 4.4.7 PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Take caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values can cause the system to malfunction. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced PCI/PnP Settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in below sections may cause system to malfunction. Plug And Play O/S [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] IRQ-3 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-4 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-5 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-7 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-9 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-10 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-11 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-14 assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-15 assigned to [PCI Device] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] Plug And Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Yes] and if you install a Plug and Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug and Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register. Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] When set to [Yes], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] Palette Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.5 Power menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [Yes] [No] 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Yes] 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) support in the Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC). When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Configure CPU. Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Allows BIOS to use PCI bus mastering when reading/writing to IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] IRQ-xx assigned to [PCI Device] When set to [PCI Device], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [PCI Device] [Reserved]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4-29 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 4.5.5 APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration APM Configuration Enabled or disable APM. APM Configuration Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Keyboard Wakeup Password : Not Installed Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Off] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Off, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either off or on state, whatever the system state was before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable RTC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items RTC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour, RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] Power On By External Modems [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-off mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try. Turning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is off causes an initialization string that turns the system power on.
4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password Wakeup Password This item appears only when the Power On By PS/2 Keyboard is set to Enabled. Select this item then press <Enter> to set or change the keyboard wakeup password. Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Keyboard Wakeup Password Shows Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed i f there is no wake-up password installed. After you have set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an ATX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4-31 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 4.5.6 Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Hardware Monitor Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Hardware Monitor CPU Temperature [51úC/122.5úF] MB Temperature [41úC/105.5úF] CPU Fan Speed [3813 RPM] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Chassis Fan Speed [N/A] Power Fan Speed [N/A] VCORE Voltage [ 1.320V] 3.3V Voltage [ 3.345V] 5V Voltage [ 5.094V] 12V Voltage [11.880V] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] MB Temperature [xxxC/xxxF] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard and CPU temperatures. Select Disabled if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the motherboard, the field shows N/A. CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Q-Fan Control [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. When this field is set to [Enabled], the CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio item appears to allow selection of the appropriate fan speed ratio. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] CPU Q-Fan Mode [PWM] Allows you to select the type of CPU fan cable connected to the CPU fan connector. Set to [PWM] when using a 4-pin CPU fan cable. Set to [DC] when using a 3-pin CPU fan cable. Configuration options: [PWM] [DC] The CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode CPU Q-Fan Mode , CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio CPU Fan Ratio , and CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target CPU Target Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature items appear when you enable the CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan CPU Q-Fan Control Control Control Control Control feature.
4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] CPU Fan Ratio [Auto] Allows you to select the appropriate CPU fan speed ratio for the system. The default [Auto] automatically selects the fan speed ratio when operating a low CPU temperature. Select a higher ratio if you installed additional devices and the system requires more ventilation. This item appears only when the CPU Q-Fan Control item is Enabled. Configuration options: [Auto] [90%] [80%] [70%] [60%] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] CPU Target Temperature [xxxúC] Allows you to set the CPU temperature threshold when the CPU fan speed is increased to lower the CPU temperature. The default target temperature is the Intel î Fan Speed Control (FSC) recommended value. This item appears only when the CPU Q-Fan Control item is Enabled. Configuration options: [35úC] [38úC] [41úC] [44úC] [47úC] [50úC] [53úC] [56úC] [59úC] [62úC] [65úC] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the chassis fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the chassis, the specific field shows N/A. Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the power fan speed in rotations per minute (RPM). If the fan is not connected to the power fan connector, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage VCORE Voltage, 3.3V Voltage, 5V Voltage, 12V Voltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. Some CPU fans with a 4-pin cable do not comply with Intel î âÂÂs PWM fan specification. When using this type of CPU fan, you can not reduce the CPU fan speed even if you set the CPU Q-Fan Mode to [PWM].
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit APM Configuration Boot Device Priority Boot Settings Configuration Security 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority Boot Device Priority 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appears on the screen depends on the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] Boot Device Priority 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIVE] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST330620A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S360]
4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 4.6.2 Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] AddOn ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Wait For âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Set this item to [Enabled] to use the ASUS MyLogo⢠feature. Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] Wait for âÂÂF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for the F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 4-35 Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Hit âÂÂDELâ Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âÂÂPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 4.6.3 Security Security Security Security Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press <Enter> to display the configuration options. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disabled password. Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press <Enter>. 2. From the password box, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you successfully set your password. To change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. To clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press <Enter>. The message âÂÂPassword Uninstalledâ appears.
4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings. User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] User Access Level (Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access No Access No Access No Access No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility. View Only View Only View Only View Only View Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited Limited Limited Limited Limited allows changes only to selected fields, such as Date and Time. Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility. Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed Not Installed . After you set a password, this item shows Installed Installed Installed Installed Installed . To set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press <Enter>. 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of at least six letters and/or numbers, then press <Enter>. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. Select Screen Select Item If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real Time Clock (RTC) RAM. See section âÂÂ2.6 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM. Security Settings Supervisor Password : Not Installed User Password : Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled]
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 4-37 The message âÂÂPassword Installedâ appears after you set your password successfully. To change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Clear User Password Select this item to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility. When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.7 Exit menu Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit. Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Exit Options Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults
4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Chapter 4: BIOS setup Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than System Date, System Time, and Password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes to load default values. Select Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes o r make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Press <Enter> to save the changes while exiting. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. An onboard backup battery sustains the CMOS RAM so it stays on even when the PC is turned off. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes to save changes and exit.
5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 Chapter summary 5.1 Installing an operating system ............................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ........................................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ........................................................... 5-8 5.4 RAID configurations ............................................................ 5-16 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk ................................................. 5-24
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 If Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun Autorun i s NOT enabled in your computer, browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP.EXE from the BIN folder. Double-click the ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE ASSETUP.EXE t o run the CD. Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install Click an item to install 5.1 Installing an operating system This motherboard supports Windows î 2000/2003 Server/XP operating systems (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates to maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Support CD information The support CD that came with the motherboard package contains the drivers, software applications, and utilities that you can install to avail all motherboard features. 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 5.2.1 Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Running the support CD Place the support CD to the optical drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer. ⢠Motherboard settings and hardware options vary. Use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for reference only. Refer to your OS documentation for detailed information. ⢠Make sure that you install Windows î 2000 Service Pack 4 or the Windows î XP Service Pack 1 or later versions before installing the drivers for better compatibility and system stability. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website(www.asus.com) for updates. Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to Click an icon to display support display support display support display support display support CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard CD/motherboard information information information information information
5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 5.2.2 Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update QFE Update Installs the Quick Fix Engineering (QFE) driver updates. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program Intel Chipset Inf Update Program This item installs the Intel î Chipset INF Update Program. This driver enables Plug-n-Play INF support for the Intel î chipset components on the motherboard. When installed to the target system, this driver provides the method for configuring the chipset components. You can install this utility using three different modes: interactive, silent, or unattended preload. Installing the driver in interactive mode requires user input during installation. User input is not required when installing the driver in silent or unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility for details. Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Realtek Audio Driver Executes the wizard to install the Realtek î ALC861 audio driver and application. Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Marvell Yukon Gigabit Ethernet Driver Installs the Marvell î Yukon 88E8053 PCI Express⢠Gigabit LAN driver that provides up to 1000 Mbps data transfer rates.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-3 The screen display and drivers option may not be the same for different operating system versions. 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 5.2.3 Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application IT8212 Driver and Application Installs the IT8212 driver and application. Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Make ITE8212 Driver Disk Allows you to create a driver disk for the IT8212 IDE RAID setup. USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver USB 2.0 Driver Installs the USB 2.0 driver. Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Marvell Yukon VCT Application Installs the Marvell î Yukon VCT cable diagnostic application that analyzes and reports LAN cable faults and shorts. See page 5-10 for details. ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe ASUS PC Probe This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you of any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer in healthy operating condition.
5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update The ASUS Update utility allows you to update the motherboard BIOS in a Windows î environment. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). See page 4-7 for details. ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster ASUS Ai Booster The ASUS AI Booster application allows you to overclock the CPU speed in a Windows î environment. Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX Microsoft DirectX The Microsoft DirectX 9.0b is a multimedia technology that enhances computer graphics and sounds. DirectX improves the multimedia features of your computer so you can enjoy watching TV and movies, capturing videos, or playing games in your computer. Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Anti-virus software Installs the anti-virus program. View the online help for detailed information. ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader ADOBE Acrobat Reader The Adobeî Acrobatî Reader V5.0 is for opening, viewing, and printing documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver ASUS Screen Saver Installs the ASUS screen saver. The screen display and utilities option may not be the same for different operating system versions.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 5-5 The screen display and manuals option may not be the same for different operating system versions. 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 5.2.4 Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu Manuals menu The Manuals menu contains a list of supplementary user manuals. Click an item to open the folder of the user manual. ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual ITE8212 RAID UserâÂÂs Manual Allows you to open the ITE î 8212F RAID UserâÂÂs manual. Install the Adobe î Acrobat î Reader from the Utilities menu before opening the manual files.
5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 5.2.5 ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information ASUS Contact information Click the Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact tab to display the ASUS contact information. You can also find this information on the inside front cover of this user guide. 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 5.2.6 Other information Other information Other information Other information Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Motherboard Info Displays the general specifications of the motherboard.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 5-7 Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Technical support Form Displays the ASUS Technical Support Request Form that you have to fill out when requesting technical support. Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Filelist Displays the contents of the support CD and a brief description of each in text format. Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Browse this CD Displays the support CD contents in graphical format.
5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 5-8 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.3 Software information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software application for more information. 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 5.3.1 ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠ASUS MyLogo⢠The ASUS MyLogo⢠utility lets you customize the boot logo. The boot logo is the image that appears on screen during the Power-On-Self-Tests (POST). The ASUS MyLogo⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update ASUS Update utility from the support CD. See section âÂÂ5.2.3 Utilities menuâ for details. To launch the ASUS MyLogoâ¢: 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility. Refer to section âÂÂ4.1.4 ASUS Update utilityâ for details. 2. Select Options Options Options Options Options from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 3. Check the option Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot Launch MyLogo to replace system boot logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS logo before flashing BIOS , then click Next Next Next Next Next . 4. Select Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file Update BIOS from a file from the drop down menu, then click Next Next Next Next Next . 5. When prompted, locate the new BIOS file, then click Next Next Next Next Next . The ASUS MyLogo window appears. 6. From the left window pane, select the folder that contains the image you intend to use as your boot logo. ⢠Before using the ASUS MyLogoâ¢, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. See section âÂÂ4.1.2 AFUDOS utilityâÂÂ. ⢠Make sure that the BIOS item Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo Full Screen Logo i s set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogoâ¢. See section âÂÂ4.6.2 Boot Settings ConfigurationâÂÂ. ⢠You can create your own boot logo image in GIF, JPG, or BMP file formats.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 9. When the screen returns to the ASUS Update utility, flash the original BIOS to load the new boot logo. 10. After flashing the BIOS, restart the computer to display the new boot logo during POST. 8. Adjust the boot image to your desired size by selecting a value on the Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio Ratio box. 7. When the logo images appear on the right window pane, select an image to enlarge by clicking on it.
5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 3. Click the Run Run Run Run Run button to perform a cable test. 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 5.3.2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 AI NET 2 The Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠(VCT) is a cable diagnostic utility that reports LAN cable faults and shorts using the Time Domain Reflectometry (TDR) technology. The VCT detects and reports open and shorted cables, impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems, and pair skew problems of up to 64 ns at one meter accuracy. The VCT feature reduces networking and support costs through a highly manageable and controlled network system. This utility can be incorporated in the network systems software for ideal field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠Using the Virtual Cable Tester⢠To use the the Marvell î Virtual Cable Tester⢠utility: 1. Launch the VCT utility from the Windows î desktop by clicking Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester Start > All Programs > Marvell > Virtual Cable Tester . 2. Click Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester Virtual Cable Tester from the menu to display the screen below. ⢠The VCT only runs on systems with Windows î XP or Windows î 2000 operating systems. ⢠The VCT utility only tests Ethernet cables connected to Gigabit LAN port(s). ⢠The Run Run Run Run Run button on the Virtual Cable Tester⢠main window is disabled if no problem is detected on the LAN cable(s) connected to the LAN port(s). ⢠If you want the system to check the LAN cable before entering the OS, enable the POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable POST Check LAN cable item in the BIOS.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 5.3.3 Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations Audio configurations The Realtek î ALC861 High Definition Audio CODEC provides 8-channel audio capability to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software provides Jack-Sensing function, S/PDIF out support and interrupt capability. The includes the Realtek î proprietary UAJ î (Universal Audio Jack) technology for three ports (Line-In, Line-Out and Mic-In), eliminating cable connection errors and giving users plug and play convenience. The utility is automatically installed when you install the Realtek Audio Driver from the motherboard support CD. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.2 DriverâÂÂs MenuâÂÂ. Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager Launching the Realtek Sound Manager From the Windows î taskbar, double-click the Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect icon to display the Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager . Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Realtek Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect icon icon icon icon icon Using the Realtek Using the Realtek Using the Realtek Using the Realtek Using the Realtek î î î î î Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager Sound Manager The Realtek î Sound Manager has six menu options: Sound Effect, Speaker Configuration, 3D Audio Demo, General, SPDIF, and Audio Wizard. Click a button to display the details. Sound Effect The Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect Sound Effect option allows you to set the environment, change the karaoke configuration, and adjust the equalizer settings. Click the Sound Sound Sound Sound Sound Effect Effect Effect Effect Effect button to display the following. Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment settings settings settings settings settings Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer settings settings settings settings settings Karaoke Karaoke Karaoke Karaoke Karaoke
5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Environment. Environment. Environment. Environment. Environment. This section contains various pre-programmed environment settings. There are five featured materials that emulate the bathroom, an auditorium, sewer pipe, an arena, and underwater environments. Click the corresponding button to set an environment emulation. To set other environment emulations, click the combo list box and select from any of the environment settings. Equalizer. Equalizer. Equalizer. Equalizer. Equalizer. The Equalizer section allows you to adjust the amplifier frequency. Use the 10-band equalizer to individually control the different frequency bands of your speaker system, or click a music style preset button to load a pre-defined equalizer setting. Click the corresponding control button to load, save, reset, or delete a user-defined preset. Karaoke. Karaoke. Karaoke. Karaoke. Karaoke. The Karaoke section allows you to toggle the voice and adjust the pitch of the audio. Click the up or down arrows to adjust the pitch or the icon to toggle the voice. Speaker Configuration The Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration option allows you to configure and test your speaker setup. Select your speaker setup to display the function of the front and back panel audio ports.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 5-13 3D Audio Demo The 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo 3D Audio Demo option shows a 3D audio demonstration with variable sound type, moving path and EAX settings. Click the Play Play Play Play Play o r Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop button to start or stop the demo. Click the corresponding option button to adjust the sound type, moving path and EAX settings. General The General General General General General option displays your audio driver version, DirectX version, audio controller, and audio CODEC. Enable the option button to display the Sound Effect icon on the system tray. To change the language interface, click the combo list box and select from the list of supported languages.
5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support ⢠The front panel audio connectors support both the Realtek î Jack-sensing and UAJ î technology features. ⢠The Back Panel audio connectors support the Realtek î Jack-sensing function only. SPDIF The SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF SPDIF option allows you to set the S/PDIF output and change the S/PDIF output frequency. Click the option button of your choice. Audio Wizard The Audio Wizard Audio Wizard Audio Wizard Audio Wizard Audio Wizard guides you to the proper audio port for the device you plugged in. Click the Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel Front Panel o r Back Panel Back Panel Back Panel Back Panel Back Panel button to display their respective audio ports. Click OK OK OK OK OK when finished.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 5-15 Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation Rear panel audio ports function variation The functions of the Line Out (lime), Line In (blue), Mic (pink), Rear Speaker Out (gray), Side Speaker Out (black), and Center/Subwoofer (yellow orange) ports on the rear panel change when you select the 4-channel, 6-channel or 8-channel audio configuration as shown in the following table. Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Audio 2, 4, 6, or 8-channel configuration Light Blue Line In Line In Line In Line In Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Mic In Mic In Gray ⢠Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Black ⢠⢠⢠Side Speaker Out Yellow Orange ⢠⢠Center/Subwoofer Center/Subwoofer Port Port Port Port Port Headset Headset Headset Headset Headset 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 4-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 6-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 8-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel 2-channel
5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support If you want to boot the system from a hard disk drive included in a created RAID set, copy first the RAID driver from the support CD to a floppy disk before you install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. Refer to section âÂÂ5.5 Creating a RAID driver diskâ for details. 5.4 RAID configurations The motherboard comes with the ITE î 8212F RAID controller that allows you to configure IDE and Serial ATA hard disk drives as RAID sets. The motherboard supports the following RAID configurations. RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 RAID 0 (Data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. Two hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. Use of two new identical hard disk drives is required for this setup. RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 RAID 1 (Data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. Use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive for this setup. The new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive. RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 RAID 0 1 i s data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. With the RAID 0 1 configuration you get all the benefits of both RAID 0 and RAID 1 configurations. Use four new hard disk drives or use an existing drive and three new drives for this setup. JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD JBOD (Spanning) stands for Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks Just a Bunch of Disks and refers to hard disk drives that are not yet configured as a RAID set. This configuration stores the same data redundantly on multiple disks that appear as a single disk on the operating system. Spanning does not deliver any advantage over using separate disks independently and does not provide fault tolerance or other RAID performance benefits.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5-17 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 5.4.1 Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks Installing hard disks The motherboard supports Ultra DMA 133/100/66 and Serial ATA hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a disk array. Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks Installing Parallel ATA hard disks To install IDE hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Set the jumpers of each hard disk as Master/Master or Slave/Slave. 2. Install the hard disks into the drive bays. 3. Connect the HDD signal cables. 4. Connect a 4-pin power cable to the power connector on each drive. Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks Installing Serial ATA (SATA) hard disks To install the SATA hard disks for a RAID configuration: 1. Install the SATA hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Connect the SATA signal cables. 3. Connect a SATA power cable to the power connector on each drive.
5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE Entering the ITE î î î î î 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility 8212F Setup Utility To enter the ITE î 8212F Setup Utility: 1. Boot up your computer. 2. The ITE8212F controller scans for IDE devices attached on the IDE RAID ports. When prompted, press <Ctrl F> or <Ctrl E> to display the main menu of the utility. Auto Configuration...........[ 1 ] Define RAID..................[ 2 ] Delete RAID..................[ 3 ] Rebuild RAID.................[ 4 ] RAID Card Configuration......[ 5 ] IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit [MAIN MENU] 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 5.4.2 ITE ITE ITE ITE ITE î î î î î 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations 8212F RAID configurations The ITE î 8212F IDE RAID controller supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD configurations. Use the IT8212 BIOS Setup Utility or the ATA RAID Manager application to configure a disk array. Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items Setting the BIOS RAID items After installing the hard disk drives, make sure to set the necessary RAID items in the BIOS before setting your RAID configuration. To set the BIOS RAID items: 1. Boot the system and press <Del> during the Power-On Self-Test (POST) to enter the BIOS Setup Utility. 2. From the Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration Advanced > Onboard Devices Configuration menu in the BIOS, set the ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller ITE8212F Controller item to RAID Mode. 3. Save your changes and exit Setup.
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 5-19 RAID Mode................................ Stripe Un-used Drive(s)......................... 4 Drive(s) in Array........................ 0 Array Capacity (size in MB).............. 8056 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Auto Configuration Menu ] [ Array Configuration ] Setup Array Type as: RAID 0 [ âÂÂ, â ,Space] Change Option [CTRL-Y] Save [ESC] Exit 3. At the bottom of the screen are the navigation keys. These keys allow you to move through and select from the menu options. Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array Auto-configuring a RAID array This option allows you to select a supported RAID set for the utility to automatically configure. To auto-configure a RAID set: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <1>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the left or right arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID set. As you select an option, the screen displays the array configuration of the RAID based on the number of IDE devices installed. 3. Press <Ctrl Y> to save your RAID set. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. 4. Press the number of your selection or <Esc> to exit. [1]..[5] Select [ESC] Exit
5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 5-20 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 1 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â : Capacity (GB) ⦠: Bootable Array [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Space] Boot Array [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array Defining a RAID array This option allows you to define supported RAID arrays. To define a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <2>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys or the space bar to select a RAID array, then press <Enter>. The following sub-menu appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Define RAID Sub-Menu ] â : Capacity (GB) [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Space] Change Option [Ctrl-Y] Save [ESC] Exit Channel ID Drive Name Size(MB) Assignment Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Y [ Drive Assignments] Array No Array Mode Drive No Status Array 0 Stripe 4 Functional Block Size: 64KB
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 5-21 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select editable fields. 4. Use the Space bar to change field values. 5. Press <Ctrl Y> to save RAID array. 6. Press <Esc> to exit. Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array Deleting a RAID array This option allows you to delete an existing RAID array. To delete a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <3>. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Delete RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 2 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â : Capacity (GB) ⦠: Bootable Array [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [D] Delete [ESC] Exit 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <D> to delete. 3. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Rebuild RAID Menu ] Array No Array Mode Drive No Size(MB) Status Array 0 Stripe 4 XXXXXX Functional Array 1 Mirror 2 XXXX Functional Array 2 ---- ---- ----- ----- Array 3 ---- ---- ----- ----- â : Capacity (GB) ⦠: Bootable Array [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array Rebuilding a RAID array This option allows you to reconstruct an existing RAID array. This option applies only to RAID1 (Mirrored) or RAID 0 1(Striped Mirrored) sets. To rebuild a RAID array: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <4>. The following screen appears. 2. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a RAID array, then press <Enter> to rebuild. The following screen appears. IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ Source Drive ] [ Target Drive ] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX â : Capacity (GB) [ â ] Up [ â ] Down [Enter] Select [ESC] Exit [ Drive List] Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Channel ID Drive Name Size (MB) Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXX Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX
ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 ASUS P4GD1 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 5-23 Channel 0 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000AC00 Channel 1 Interrupt: B I/P Port: 0000A800 IT8212 Setup Utility (C)Copyright 2002-2004 ITE, Inc. [ RAID Card Configuration ] [ RAID Card Resource ] Auto-Rebuild: Enable â : Capacity (GB) Drive Mode: P = PIO, D = DMA, U = UDMA [ âÂÂ, â ,Space] Change Option [ESC] Exit Channel Size Drive ID Drive Name (MB) Array No Mode Pri/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U5 Pri/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U2 Sec/D0 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U4 Sec/D1 XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX Array 0 U6 [ Drive Status ] 3. Use the up or down arrow keys to select a drive, then press <Enter>. Follow succeeding screen instructions. 4. Press <Esc> to exit. Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration Viewing your RAID configuration This option allows you to view your RAID configuration. You can also enable or disable the Auto-rebuild function in this section. To view your RAID configuration: 1. From the IT8212 Setup Utility screen, press <5>. The following screen appears. 3. Use the left or right keys or the space bar enable or disable the Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild Auto-rebuild item. 4. Press <Esc> to exit.
5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support Chapter 5: Software support 5.5 Creating a RAID driver disk A floppy disk with the RAID driver is required when installing Windows î 2000/XP operating system on a hard disk drive that is included in a RAID set. To create a RAID driver disk: 1. Place the motherboard support CD into the CD-ROM drive. 2. When the Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers Drivers menu appears, select the RAID driver disk you want to create: ⢠Click Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver Make ITE8212 Driver t o create an ITE î 8212F RAID driver disk. Or Browse the contents of the support CD to locate the driver disk utility. ⢠Go to \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe \Drivers\ITE8212\Makedisk.exe for the ITE î 8212F RAID driver disk utility 4. Insert a formatted high-density floppy disk to the floppy disk drive. 5. Follow succeeding screen information to complete process. 6. After creating a RAID driver disk, eject the floppy disk, then write-protect it to prevent computer virus infection. To install the RAID driver: 1. Install an operating system to the selected hard disk drive. During installation, the computer prompts you to press the F6 F6 F6 F6 F6 key if you want to install a third-party SCSI or RAID driver. 2. Press <F6> then insert the RAID driver disk into the floppy disk drive. 3. Follow the succeeding screen instructions to complete the installation. Refer to section âÂÂ5.2.2 Drivers menuâ for details.